1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes true
139 \output_changes false
143 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
154 by the \SpecialChar LyX
159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
161 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
162 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
163 Documentation mailing list:
164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
166 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
177 \begin_inset Newline newline
181 \begin_inset Newline newline
185 \begin_inset Note Note
188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
190 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
196 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
218 What is \SpecialChar LyX
222 \begin_layout Standard
224 is a document preparation system.
225 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
226 scripts, publishable books, business
227 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
228 It is unlike most other
229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
236 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
238 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
254 pt type, left justified, 5
255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
264 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
268 \begin_layout Standard
269 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
274 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
278 \begin_layout Standard
283 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
284 's philosophy: most importantly,
285 the format of all of the manuals.
286 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
287 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
293 manual describes that, too.
296 \begin_layout Section
301 \begin_layout Standard
302 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
303 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
305 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
306 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
310 \begin_layout Standard
311 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
312 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
313 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
315 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
316 only a vertical scrollbar.
317 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
318 The first case is large images.
319 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
320 image and use the option
331 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
334 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
335 this doesn't work for equations yet.
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
340 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
348 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
355 \begin_layout Section
359 \begin_layout Standard
360 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
362 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
364 Just select the manual you want to read from the
371 \begin_layout Section
372 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
376 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
383 \begin_layout Standard
384 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
385 can be configured via the menu
387 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
391 \begin_inset Index idx
394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
401 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
403 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
404 packages are available.
405 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
407 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
409 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
414 \begin_inset space \space{}
417 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
418 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
420 To force \SpecialChar LyX
421 to re-inspect your system, you should use
423 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
427 \begin_inset Index idx
430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
437 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
438 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
441 \begin_layout Section
444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
446 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
453 \begin_layout Standard
454 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
455 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
456 installed, but you will not be
457 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
458 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
459 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
460 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
461 document can always be output as plain text
465 \begin_layout Standard
466 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
467 or DocBook classes or packages.
468 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
469 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
475 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
478 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
486 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
487 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
494 \begin_inset Index idx
497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
498 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
506 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
513 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
517 \begin_layout Chapter
518 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
522 \begin_layout Section
523 Basic File Operations
524 \begin_inset Index idx
527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
536 \begin_layout Standard
541 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
542 in addition to some more advanced operations:
545 \begin_layout Itemize
567 \begin_layout Itemize
583 arg "buffer-new-template"
589 \begin_layout Itemize
611 \begin_layout Itemize
621 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
657 \begin_layout Itemize
669 arg "buffer-write-as"
675 \begin_layout Itemize
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Standard
704 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
705 a few minor differences.
708 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
719 command lists the available templates.
720 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
721 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
722 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
730 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
737 \begin_layout Standard
738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
770 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
771 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
772 is just that — a big, blank space.
780 \begin_layout Standard
801 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
806 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
809 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
827 will reload the document from disk.
828 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
829 and want to restore it to the last save.
838 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
839 them as your changes.
842 \begin_layout Section
843 Basic Editing Features
844 \begin_inset Index idx
847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
856 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
863 \begin_layout Standard
864 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
865 can perform cut and paste operations
866 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
867 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
868 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
869 editing features and how to access
871 We will start with cut and paste.
874 \begin_layout Standard
875 As you might expect, the
879 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
880 various other editing features.
881 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
885 \begin_layout Itemize
891 \begin_inset Index idx
894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
923 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_inset Index idx
932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
961 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_inset Index idx
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
995 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_layout Itemize
1009 \begin_inset space ~
1015 \begin_layout Itemize
1019 \begin_inset space ~
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset Index idx
1032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 \begin_inset Index idx
1044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1059 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1069 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1075 \begin_layout Standard
1076 The first three are self-explanatory.
1077 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1078 and other programs by
1099 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1100 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1105 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1106 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1107 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1108 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1109 into individual cells.
1113 \begin_inset space ~
1118 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1119 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1123 \begin_layout Standard
1127 \begin_inset space ~
1132 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1134 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1136 \begin_inset space ~
1143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1149 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1150 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1151 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1157 \begin_inset space \space{}
1160 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1161 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1164 \begin_inset space ~
1167 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1186 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1187 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1189 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1193 \begin_inset space ~
1198 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1199 start a new paragraph.
1200 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1201 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1209 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1226 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1229 paste from the primary selection.
1230 This is normally the currently selected text.
1233 \begin_layout Standard
1236 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1238 \begin_inset space ~
1242 \begin_inset space ~
1250 \begin_inset space ~
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1260 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1266 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1269 \begin_inset space ~
1278 \begin_inset space ~
1283 button to skip the current word.
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1292 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1301 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1303 If the toggle is set, searching for
1304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1315 will not match the word
1316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1330 Match whole words only
1332 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1333 to only find complete words, e.
1334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1363 offers also an advanced
1366 \begin_inset space ~
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1375 feature that is described in section
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1382 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1389 \begin_layout Standard
1390 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1391 \begin_inset space \space{}
1395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1403 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1405 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1410 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1417 \begin_layout Standard
1421 arg "inset-select-all"
1424 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1425 When the cursor is inside an inset
1428 arg "inset-select-all"
1431 selects the content of the inset.
1435 arg "inset-select-all"
1438 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1443 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1446 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1450 \begin_layout Section
1452 \begin_inset Index idx
1455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1462 \begin_inset Index idx
1465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1474 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1481 \begin_layout Standard
1482 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1484 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1490 or the toolbar button
1496 to undo some mistake.
1497 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1502 or the toolbar button
1509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1516 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1520 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1523 \begin_layout Standard
1524 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1533 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1534 This is a consequence of the 100
1535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1538 step undo limit mentioned above.
1541 \begin_layout Standard
1550 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1552 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1556 \begin_layout Section
1558 \begin_inset Index idx
1561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1570 \begin_layout Standard
1571 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1574 \begin_layout Enumerate
1579 \begin_layout Itemize
1584 once anywhere in the edit window.
1585 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1589 \begin_layout Enumerate
1594 \begin_layout Itemize
1601 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1604 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1607 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1608 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1611 \begin_layout Itemize
1612 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1622 \begin_layout Enumerate
1623 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1627 \begin_layout Standard
1628 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1629 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1633 \begin_layout Section
1635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1637 name "sec:Navigating"
1642 \begin_inset Index idx
1645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1654 \begin_layout Standard
1656 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1659 \begin_layout Itemize
1664 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1665 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1668 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1671 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1673 \begin_inset space ~
1678 or by the toolbar button
1681 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1687 \begin_layout Itemize
1688 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1690 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1693 and use the same menu to return to them.
1694 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1697 \begin_layout Standard
1701 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1706 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1709 \begin_inset space ~
1714 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1715 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1716 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1717 your last editing position.
1720 \begin_layout Standard
1725 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1729 \begin_layout Subsection
1731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1733 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1738 \begin_inset Index idx
1741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1742 Navigating ! Outline
1748 \begin_inset Index idx
1751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1760 \begin_layout Standard
1761 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1762 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1763 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1765 \begin_inset space ~
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1771 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1775 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1776 \begin_inset space ~
1780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1782 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1787 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1792 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1793 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1794 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1795 dialog and to modify the citation.
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1799 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1801 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1802 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1810 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1814 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1815 you further to control the display.
1820 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1821 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1827 option keeps it in the current view state.
1828 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1829 \begin_inset space ~
1832 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1833 \begin_inset space ~
1836 3, the subsections of sections
1837 \begin_inset space ~
1840 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1845 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1850 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1860 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1863 \begin_layout Standard
1870 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1871 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1885 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1886 So, for example, you can move section
1887 \begin_inset space ~
1891 \begin_inset space ~
1894 2.4 or after section
1895 \begin_inset space ~
1900 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1913 (or the corresponding key bindings
1921 ) you can change the level of sections.
1922 So you can for example make section
1923 \begin_inset space ~
1927 \begin_inset space ~
1931 \begin_inset space ~
1937 \begin_layout Subsection
1938 Horizontal Scrolling
1939 \begin_inset Index idx
1942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1943 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1953 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1959 \begin_inset space \space{}
1963 \begin_inset space ~
1966 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1967 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1968 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1972 \begin_layout Standard
1973 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1977 \begin_layout Itemize
1979 is used on a small tablet computer
1982 \begin_layout Itemize
1983 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1995 \begin_inset space ~
2008 \begin_layout Itemize
2009 Math constructs with long command names
2012 \begin_layout Standard
2013 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2014 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2016 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2017 windows so that table
2018 \begin_inset space ~
2022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2024 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2029 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2031 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2032 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2035 \begin_layout Standard
2036 \begin_inset Float table
2042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2043 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2048 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2052 Horizontal scrolling test.
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Tabular
2063 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2064 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2109 \begin_layout Section
2110 Input/Word Completion
2111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2113 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2162 \begin_layout Standard
2164 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2166 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2167 is used to propose completions.
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2171 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2174 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2179 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2186 \begin_inset space ~
2190 \begin_inset space ~
2195 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2199 \begin_inset space ~
2204 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2205 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2215 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2216 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2217 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2218 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2221 \begin_layout Standard
2223 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2224 completions available.
2229 key to accept a proposed completion.
2230 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2231 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2232 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2240 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2241 ing options for text.
2242 The special math option
2246 enables characters to be composed.
2247 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2248 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2251 , you can then input the characters
2252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2263 to a formula to get it.
2264 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2265 of the math toolbar.
2266 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2270 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2271 's installation folder.
2272 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2281 \begin_layout Section
2283 \begin_inset Index idx
2286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2293 \begin_inset Index idx
2296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2325 \begin_inset Index idx
2328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2359 \begin_layout Standard
2360 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2374 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2377 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2381 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2382 \begin_inset space ~
2386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2388 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2395 \begin_layout Standard
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2428 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2432 \begin_layout Labeling
2433 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2437 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2438 LatexCommand nomenclature
2440 description "Tabulator key"
2446 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2448 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2449 \begin_inset space ~
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2455 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2462 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2466 , especially section
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "subsec:Lists"
2479 If you are still confused, look in the
2484 \begin_inset Newline newline
2492 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2493 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2497 \begin_layout Labeling
2498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2502 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2503 LatexCommand nomenclature
2505 description "Escape key"
2512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2519 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2520 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2523 \begin_layout Labeling
2524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2530 \begin_inset space ~
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2541 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2542 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2546 \begin_layout Standard
2547 There are three modifier keys:
2550 \begin_layout Labeling
2551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2569 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2570 LatexCommand nomenclature
2572 description "Control key"
2576 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2577 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2581 \begin_layout Itemize
2590 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2593 \begin_layout Itemize
2602 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2605 \begin_layout Itemize
2614 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2618 \begin_layout Labeling
2619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2637 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2638 LatexCommand nomenclature
2640 description "Shift key"
2644 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2645 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2648 \begin_layout Labeling
2649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2667 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2668 LatexCommand nomenclature
2670 description "Alt or Meta key"
2674 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2675 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2676 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2682 \begin_inset Newline newline
2685 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2687 menu accelerator keys
2690 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2691 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2695 \begin_layout Standard
2696 For example, the sequence
2697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2703 \begin_inset space ~
2707 \begin_inset space ~
2713 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2740 \begin_inset space ~
2746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_layout Standard
2761 manual lists all other things bound to the
2769 \begin_layout Standard
2770 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2772 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2773 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2774 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2775 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2776 The \SpecialChar LyX
2777 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2778 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2779 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2781 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2797 followed by a capital
2804 \begin_layout Chapter
2807 \begin_inset Index idx
2810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2820 \begin_layout Section
2822 \begin_inset Index idx
2825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2834 \begin_layout Subsection
2838 \begin_layout Standard
2839 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2840 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2841 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2842 numbering schemes, and so on.
2843 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2844 and format the title of your document differently.
2847 \begin_layout Standard
2852 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2853 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2854 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2855 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2856 picks one for you by default.
2857 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2860 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_inset Index idx
2865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2874 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2881 \begin_layout Standard
2882 You can select a class using the
2884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2885 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2889 \begin_inset Index idx
2892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2899 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2903 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2907 \begin_layout Standard
2908 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2913 \begin_layout Description
2914 Article for basic articles
2917 \begin_layout Description
2918 Report for basic reports
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Book for writing a book
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Letter for US-style letters
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2931 only uses if you have installed
2932 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2933 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2934 distributions will include
2936 Here are some of the classes.
2937 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2939 Special Document Classes
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2952 \begin_layout Description
2953 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2957 \begin_layout Description
2958 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2962 \begin_layout Description
2963 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2964 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2965 There are three article layouts available.
2966 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2967 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2968 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2969 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2974 sequential numbering
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2979 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2980 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2981 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 Beamer Layout for presentations
2988 \begin_layout Description
2989 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2990 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2991 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2992 with \SpecialChar LyX
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3000 \begin_layout Description
3002 \begin_inset space ~
3005 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Foils Used to make transparencies
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3018 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3019 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3020 with \SpecialChar LyX
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3026 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3029 \begin_layout Description
3030 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3039 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3040 (Is used by this document.)
3043 \begin_layout Description
3044 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3051 \begin_layout Description
3056 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3057 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3059 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3063 \begin_layout Description
3064 Slides Used to make transparencies
3067 \begin_layout Description
3069 \begin_inset space ~
3072 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3073 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3076 \begin_layout Description
3077 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3080 \begin_layout Standard
3081 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3083 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3085 Special Document Classes
3092 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3093 of the document classes.
3096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3100 \begin_layout Standard
3101 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3106 \begin_inset Index idx
3109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3126 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3127 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3129 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3132 \begin_layout Standard
3135 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3140 , are highly specialized.
3142 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3143 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3144 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3145 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3146 by some document class.
3147 There are just too many of them.
3148 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3160 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3161 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3162 document class for a new file.
3164 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3167 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3174 manual for information on how to install them.
3175 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3181 \begin_layout Standard
3182 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3183 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3184 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3185 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3186 class files to be used for dissertation
3187 s submitted to those universities.
3188 The \SpecialChar LyX
3189 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3191 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3195 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3201 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3204 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3208 name "subsec:Modules"
3213 \begin_inset Index idx
3216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 \begin_layout Standard
3226 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3227 chosen document class.
3228 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3229 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3240 \begin_inset Index idx
3243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3250 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3254 \begin_layout Standard
3255 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3256 packages or file format converters that are not always
3257 installed by default.
3259 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3260 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3261 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3262 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3264 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3265 file without the missing prerequisites.
3266 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3267 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3270 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3274 \begin_inset Index idx
3277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3278 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3284 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3292 \begin_layout Standard
3293 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3303 will advise you about these things.
3311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3315 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3320 \begin_inset Index idx
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Document ! Local Layout
3332 \begin_layout Standard
3333 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3334 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3335 : They are intended to be used in
3336 a variety of different documents.
3337 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3338 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3339 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3340 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3341 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3361 manual for information on how to use it.
3364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3368 \begin_layout Standard
3369 Each class has a default set of options.
3370 Here's a quick table describing them:
3373 \begin_layout Standard
3374 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3380 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset Tabular
3383 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3384 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 \begin_layout Standard
3844 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3850 \begin_layout Standard
3851 You're probably also wondering what
3852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3856 \begin_inset space ~
3860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3864 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3865 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3870 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3875 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3885 headings, there are also
3893 headings, and so on.
3894 We will describe these headings fully in section
3895 \begin_inset space ~
3899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3901 reference "subsec:Headings"
3908 \begin_layout Subsection
3910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3912 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3917 \begin_inset Index idx
3920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3927 \begin_inset Index idx
3930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3939 \begin_layout Standard
3940 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3942 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3949 \begin_inset space ~
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3962 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3964 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3965 doesn't support special options you want to
3966 use for your document.
3967 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3968 -class and its options, you have to read
3972 \begin_layout Standard
3976 \begin_inset space ~
3983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3989 \begin_inset space ~
3994 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3995 You can choose between the following five options:
3998 \begin_layout Labeling
3999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4004 Use default page style of current class.
4007 \begin_layout Labeling
4008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4013 No page numbers or headings.
4016 \begin_layout Labeling
4017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4025 \begin_layout Labeling
4026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4031 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4032 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4033 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4034 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4043 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4044 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4050 \begin_inset Index idx
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4055 -packages ! fancyhdr
4061 How they are defined is explained in section
4062 \begin_inset space ~
4066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4068 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4075 \begin_layout Standard
4076 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4077 \begin_inset space ~
4081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4083 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4090 \begin_layout Subsection
4091 Paper Size and Orientation
4092 \begin_inset Index idx
4095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 Document ! Paper size
4102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4104 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4111 \begin_layout Standard
4112 You can find the following options in the menu
4115 \begin_inset space ~
4122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4126 \begin_inset Index idx
4129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4138 \begin_layout Labeling
4139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4143 \begin_inset space ~
4148 What size paper to print on.
4153 \begin_layout Itemize
4159 \begin_layout Itemize
4165 \begin_layout Itemize
4171 \begin_layout Itemize
4177 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 US letter, US legal, US executive
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4196 \begin_layout Labeling
4197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4202 To choose whether to output as
4213 \begin_layout Labeling
4214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4218 \begin_inset space ~
4223 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4224 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4227 \begin_layout Subsection
4229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4231 name "subsec:Margins"
4236 \begin_inset Index idx
4239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4246 \begin_inset Index idx
4249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4258 \begin_layout Standard
4259 Paper margins are set in the menu
4261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4277 \begin_layout Standard
4278 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4279 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4280 the paper format and the font size into account.
4283 \begin_layout Subsection
4287 \begin_layout Standard
4288 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4294 That includes the paragraph environments.
4295 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4296 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4297 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4299 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4308 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4310 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4311 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4312 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4315 \begin_layout Section
4316 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4317 \begin_inset Index idx
4320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4321 Paragraph ! Indentation
4329 \begin_layout Subsection
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4333 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4340 \begin_layout Standard
4341 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4342 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4345 \begin_layout Standard
4346 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4347 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4348 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4349 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4353 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4359 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4360 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4361 language than English.
4363 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4366 \begin_layout Standard
4367 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4368 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4369 into \SpecialChar LyX
4371 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4374 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4376 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4377 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4378 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4385 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4386 goes to produce a printable file.
4391 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4393 gives you the ability globally to change
4397 these pre-coded spacings.
4398 We will explain more later.
4401 \begin_layout Subsection
4402 Paragraph Separation
4403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4405 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4410 \begin_inset Index idx
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 Paragraph ! Separation
4422 \begin_layout Standard
4430 \begin_inset space ~
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4449 \begin_inset Index idx
4452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4458 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4461 \begin_layout Subsection
4465 \begin_layout Standard
4466 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset space ~
4476 dialog and toggle the
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4487 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4491 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4492 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4496 \begin_layout Standard
4497 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4498 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4501 \begin_layout Subsection
4503 \begin_inset Index idx
4506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4507 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4515 \begin_layout Standard
4518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4522 \begin_inset Index idx
4525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4538 \begin_inset space ~
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4548 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4554 \begin_inset Index idx
4557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4559 -packages ! setspace
4564 installed to use this feature.
4569 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4571 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4573 \begin_inset space ~
4578 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4579 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4582 \begin_layout Section
4583 Paragraph Environments
4584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4586 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4591 \begin_inset Index idx
4594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4595 Paragraph ! Environments
4601 \begin_inset Index idx
4604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4605 Paragraph environments|(
4613 \begin_layout Subsection
4617 \begin_layout Standard
4618 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4621 \begin_layout Standard
4630 } \SpecialChar ldots
4640 \begin_inset Newline newline
4643 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4645 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4646 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4647 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4656 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4659 \begin_layout Standard
4660 A paragraph environment is simply a
4661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4668 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4669 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4670 scheme, labels, and so on.
4671 Additionally, you can
4672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4679 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4680 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4681 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4682 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4684 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4686 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4689 \begin_layout Standard
4690 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4691 \begin_inset Graphics
4692 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4698 at the left end of the toolbar.
4700 will change the environment of the
4704 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4705 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4706 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4710 \begin_layout Standard
4719 create a new paragraph using the
4723 paragraph environment.
4725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4732 because if you are in one of these environments:
4735 \begin_layout Itemize
4741 \begin_layout Itemize
4747 \begin_layout Itemize
4753 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Standard
4779 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4783 , rather than resetting it to
4788 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4789 \begin_inset space ~
4793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4795 reference "sec:Nesting"
4802 \begin_layout Subsection
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4807 The default paragraph environment is
4812 It creates a plain paragraph.
4814 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4815 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4816 this manual) are in the
4823 \begin_layout Standard
4824 You can nest a paragraph using the
4828 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4836 \begin_layout Subsection
4838 \begin_inset Index idx
4841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4850 \begin_layout Standard
4851 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4852 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4861 for thanks or contact information.
4862 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4863 places all of this on a separate page
4864 along with today's date.
4865 For other types of documents, the title
4866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4873 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4877 \begin_layout Standard
4879 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4893 Here's how you use them:
4896 \begin_layout Itemize
4897 Put the title of your document in the
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the author name in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4914 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4920 Note that using this environment is optional.
4921 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4922 will automatically insert today's date.
4923 If you don't want a date, use the option
4925 Suppress default date on front page
4929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4932 \begin_inset space ~
4940 \begin_layout Standard
4941 You can use footnotes to insert
4942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4949 or contact information.
4952 \begin_layout Subsection
4954 \begin_inset Index idx
4957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4966 name "subsec:Headings"
4973 \begin_layout Standard
4974 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4976 takes care of the numbering for you.
4979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4981 \begin_inset Index idx
4984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4985 Section headings ! Numbered
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4998 \begin_layout Enumerate
5004 \begin_layout Enumerate
5010 \begin_layout Enumerate
5016 \begin_layout Enumerate
5022 \begin_layout Enumerate
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Standard
5042 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5043 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5044 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5049 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5050 You group the book into chapters.
5052 does a similar grouping:
5055 \begin_layout Itemize
5060 is divided into either
5071 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 \begin_layout Itemize
5095 \begin_layout Itemize
5107 \begin_layout Itemize
5119 \begin_layout Itemize
5131 \begin_layout Standard
5132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5140 Not all document types use the
5144 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5149 is the top-level heading.
5157 \begin_layout Standard
5162 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5163 labels it with its number,
5164 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5166 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5180 \begin_inset Index idx
5183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5184 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5193 The unnumbered section headings have a
5194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 at the end of their name.
5202 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5203 the table of contents, see section
5204 \begin_inset space ~
5208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5218 Changing the Numbering
5219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5221 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5228 \begin_layout Standard
5229 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5230 in the Table of Contents.
5231 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5233 Just as certain classes start with
5247 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5257 This is something you can change.
5260 \begin_layout Standard
5263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5267 \begin_inset Index idx
5270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5279 \begin_inset space ~
5283 \begin_inset space ~
5288 you will see two counters.
5293 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5294 numbers a section heading.
5295 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5300 Short Titles of Headings
5301 \begin_inset Index idx
5304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5305 Section headings ! Short titles
5311 \begin_inset Argument 1
5314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5323 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5330 \begin_layout Standard
5331 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5332 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5333 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5334 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5337 \begin_layout Standard
5339 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5340 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5341 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5342 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5347 \begin_inset space ~
5353 This will insert a box labeled
5354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5358 \begin_inset space ~
5362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5365 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5366 This also works for captions inside floats.
5367 There can only be one short title per title.
5370 \begin_layout Standard
5371 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The following information applies to all section headings:
5382 \begin_layout Itemize
5383 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5386 \begin_layout Itemize
5387 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5398 \begin_layout Subsection
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5404 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5418 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5419 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5420 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5421 the text they contain.
5422 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5430 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5433 \begin_layout Standard
5434 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5443 when you start a new paragraph.
5444 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5448 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5449 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5450 have to change back to the
5454 environment yourself.
5457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5466 \begin_inset Index idx
5469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5478 \begin_layout Standard
5479 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5480 time for the differences.
5489 are identical except for one difference:
5493 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5502 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5505 \begin_layout Standard
5506 Here's an example of the
5519 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5521 See – no indentation!
5525 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5526 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5527 the other paragraph.
5530 \begin_layout Standard
5531 Here's another example, this time in the
5538 \begin_layout Quotation
5544 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5545 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5546 the first line, then
5550 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5554 you were quoting other text.
5557 \begin_layout Quotation
5558 Here's a new paragraph.
5559 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5560 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5564 As the examples show,
5568 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5569 They should put quotes in the
5574 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5578 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5583 \begin_inset Index idx
5586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5593 \begin_inset Index idx
5596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5612 \begin_layout Standard
5617 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5623 \begin_inset Newline newline
5626 Which I did not rehearse!
5630 It could be much worse.
5631 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5633 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5634 indented a bit more than the first.
5635 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5641 \begin_inset Newline newline
5644 And make things look fine
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5651 arg "newline-insert newline"
5657 \begin_layout Standard
5662 does not indent both margins.
5663 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5664 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5667 arg "newline-insert newline"
5673 \begin_layout Subsection
5675 \begin_inset Index idx
5678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5694 \begin_layout Standard
5696 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5706 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5707 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5716 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5717 lets you provide your own label.
5718 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5719 describing some general features of all four of them.
5722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5726 \begin_layout Standard
5727 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5729 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5739 reset the environment to
5743 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5744 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5745 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5749 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5753 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5760 \begin_layout Standard
5761 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5762 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5763 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5765 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5766 you read all of section
5767 \begin_inset space ~
5771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5773 reference "sec:Nesting"
5780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5782 \begin_inset Index idx
5785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5801 \begin_layout Standard
5802 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5806 paragraph environment.
5807 It has the following properties:
5810 \begin_layout Itemize
5811 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5815 \begin_layout Itemize
5817 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5820 \begin_layout Itemize
5821 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5825 \begin_layout Itemize
5826 The items can have any length.
5828 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5829 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5836 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 environment inside another
5845 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5853 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5860 \begin_inset space ~
5864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5866 reference "sec:Nesting"
5870 for a full explanation of nesting.
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5875 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5884 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5887 \begin_layout Standard
5888 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5889 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5892 \begin_layout Itemize
5893 The label for the first level
5897 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5901 \begin_layout Itemize
5902 The label for the second level is a dash.
5906 \begin_layout Itemize
5907 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5911 \begin_layout Itemize
5912 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5916 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 Back out to the third level.
5921 \begin_layout Itemize
5922 Back to the second level.
5926 \begin_layout Itemize
5927 Back to the outermost level.
5930 \begin_layout Standard
5931 These are the default labels for an
5936 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5938 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5941 dialog in the submenu
5946 \begin_inset Index idx
5949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5955 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5959 \begin_layout Standard
5960 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5961 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5963 \begin_inset space ~
5967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5969 reference "sec:Nesting"
5976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5978 \begin_inset Index idx
5981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5990 name "sec:Enumerate"
5997 \begin_layout Standard
6002 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6003 It has these properties:
6006 \begin_layout Enumerate
6007 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6011 \begin_layout Enumerate
6012 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6016 \begin_layout Enumerate
6018 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6021 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 environment resets the counter to one.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 \begin_layout Enumerate
6043 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6044 Items can have any length.
6047 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6052 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6060 \begin_layout Standard
6069 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6071 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6072 labels the four different levels in an
6079 \begin_layout Enumerate
6080 The first level of an
6084 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6088 \begin_layout Enumerate
6089 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6093 \begin_layout Enumerate
6094 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6098 \begin_layout Enumerate
6099 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6108 \begin_layout Enumerate
6109 Back to the third level
6113 \begin_layout Enumerate
6114 Back to the second level.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 Back to the outermost level.
6122 \begin_layout Standard
6123 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6127 environment, see section
6128 \begin_inset space ~
6132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6134 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6139 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 There is more to nesting
6148 environments than we've stated here.
6149 You should read section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "sec:Nesting"
6160 to learn more about nesting.
6163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6165 \begin_inset Index idx
6168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6177 \begin_layout Standard
6178 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6182 list has no fixed label.
6183 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6192 of the first line as the label.
6196 \begin_layout Description
6197 Example: This is an example of the
6204 \begin_layout Standard
6206 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6210 \begin_layout Standard
6212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6219 it is meant that the first usage of the
6223 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6225 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6233 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6241 \begin_inset space ~
6247 \begin_inset space ~
6251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6253 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6257 for more information.) Here is an example:
6260 \begin_layout Description
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6265 Example: This one shows how to use a
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6280 \begin_layout Description
6281 Usage: You should use the
6285 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6286 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6288 It's not a good idea to use a
6292 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6293 You're better off using
6305 paragraphs into them.
6308 \begin_layout Description
6309 Nesting: You can nest
6313 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6318 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6319 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6320 them from the first line.
6323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6325 \begin_inset Index idx
6328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6337 \begin_layout Standard
6342 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6343 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6356 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6358 Here are its properties:
6361 \begin_layout Labeling
6362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6364 \begin_inset space ~
6367 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6376 of each line as the item label.
6381 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6382 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6383 space as described above.
6386 \begin_layout Labeling
6387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6388 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6389 uses different margins for the item label and the
6390 body of the item text.
6391 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6392 label width plus a little extra space.
6396 \begin_layout Labeling
6397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6399 \begin_inset space ~
6402 width \SpecialChar LyX
6403 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6404 If the label width is larger, the label
6405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6412 into the first line.
6413 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6414 margin of the rest of the item text.
6417 \begin_layout Labeling
6418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6423 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6428 environment has the same left margin.
6429 \begin_inset Newline newline
6432 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6435 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6437 \begin_inset space ~
6442 dialog (toolbar button
6445 arg "layout-paragraph"
6452 \begin_inset space ~
6457 determines the default label width.
6458 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6467 multiple times instead.
6468 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6478 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6481 \begin_inset space ~
6486 every time you alter a label in a
6491 \begin_inset Newline newline
6494 The predefined default width is the length of
6495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6509 \begin_layout Standard
6514 list the same way as the
6518 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6524 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6528 \begin_layout Standard
6533 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6534 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6536 \begin_inset space ~
6540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6542 reference "sec:Nesting"
6546 to learn about nesting.
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6550 There is yet another feature of the
6554 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6555 left-justifies the item labels by
6557 You can use additional
6561 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6562 justifies the item label.
6567 are documented in section
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6574 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6579 Here are some examples:
6582 \begin_layout Labeling
6583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6584 Left The default for
6591 \begin_layout Labeling
6592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6593 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6600 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6603 \begin_layout Labeling
6604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6609 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6616 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6619 \begin_layout Subsection
6621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6623 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6628 \begin_inset Index idx
6631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6640 \begin_layout Standard
6641 The features described in this section require that the module
6643 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6645 is loaded in the document settings.
6646 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6652 \begin_inset Index idx
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6657 -packages ! enumitem
6665 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6666 Custom Enumerate Lists
6667 \begin_inset Index idx
6670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6679 \begin_layout Standard
6681 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6687 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6688 There you add the command
6691 \begin_layout Standard
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6712 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6713 Code, look at section
6714 \begin_inset space ~
6718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6720 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6733 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6740 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6741 For capital Roman numerals replace
6753 in the command above.
6754 For Arabic numerals use
6762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6769 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6786 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 You can only number 26
6795 \begin_inset space ~
6798 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6807 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6808 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6815 \begin_layout Enumerate
6816 \begin_inset Argument 1
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Enumerate
6846 \begin_inset Argument 1
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6872 \begin_layout Enumerate
6877 \begin_layout Enumerate
6878 \begin_inset Argument 1
6881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6905 \begin_layout Enumerate
6906 \begin_inset Argument 1
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6936 For this list these commands were used:
6939 \begin_layout Standard
6950 \begin_inset Newline newline
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6983 makes the label emphasized and
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7001 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7002 lists until you change the definition.
7010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7012 \begin_inset Index idx
7015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7024 \begin_layout Standard
7025 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7028 \begin_layout Enumerate
7029 \begin_inset Argument 1
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7051 \begin_inset Note Note
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7055 goes back to default numbering
7063 \begin_layout Enumerate
7067 \begin_layout Standard
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7076 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7081 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7082 to indicate that it is a resumed
7083 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7084 , but in the output.
7087 \begin_layout Standard
7088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7096 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7106 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7108 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7109 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7110 of a normal enumeration.
7111 There, insert the command
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7120 \begin_layout Standard
7125 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7129 \begin_layout Enumerate
7133 \begin_layout Enumerate
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7138 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7142 \begin_inset Argument 1
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7161 This enumeration starts at 4
7164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7166 \begin_inset Index idx
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7181 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7184 \begin_layout Itemize
7188 \begin_layout Itemize
7189 with standard spacing
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7195 Add there the command
7199 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7202 \begin_layout Itemize
7203 \begin_inset Argument 1
7206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7229 \begin_layout Itemize
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7234 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7241 \begin_inset Index idx
7244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7246 -packages ! enumitem
7252 For more information see its documentation,
7253 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7262 \begin_layout Standard
7263 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7265 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7266 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7270 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7273 \begin_layout Enumerate
7274 \begin_inset Argument 1
7277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7299 with negative indentation
7302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7303 Further Customization
7304 \begin_inset Index idx
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 Lists ! Customization
7316 \begin_layout Standard
7317 You can also change the style of description lists.
7321 \begin_layout Standard
7327 \begin_layout Standard
7328 changes the description label font, the command
7331 \begin_layout Standard
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7338 sets the list style.
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 An example where the command
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7350 itshape, style=nextline
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Description
7359 \begin_inset space ~
7363 \begin_inset Argument 1
7366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7372 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7384 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7385 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7389 \begin_layout Description
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7394 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7395 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7396 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7399 \begin_layout Standard
7400 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7406 \begin_inset Index idx
7409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7411 -packages ! enumitem
7417 For more information see its documentation
7418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7427 \begin_layout Subsection
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7443 \begin_inset space ~
7446 Address: An Overview
7449 \begin_layout Standard
7450 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7451 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7459 \begin_inset space ~
7465 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7466 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7467 gags on the document.
7468 In contrast, you can use the
7475 \begin_inset space ~
7480 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7481 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7485 \begin_layout Standard
7486 Of course, you're not limited to using
7493 \begin_inset space ~
7502 \begin_inset space ~
7507 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7508 some European academic papers.
7511 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7515 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7527 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7528 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7532 \begin_inset space ~
7537 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7538 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7539 Here's an example of each:
7542 \begin_layout Right Address
7544 \begin_inset Newline newline
7548 \begin_inset Newline newline
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7555 When is it? What is today?
7558 \begin_layout Standard
7562 \begin_inset space ~
7568 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7570 the largest block of text on a single line.
7571 Here's an example of the
7578 \begin_layout Address
7580 \begin_inset Newline newline
7583 Where do I send this
7584 \begin_inset Newline newline
7587 Your post office and country
7590 \begin_layout Standard
7591 As you can see, both
7598 \begin_inset space ~
7603 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7608 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7609 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7615 This makes sense, since
7623 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7624 Thus, you have to use
7631 arg "newline-insert newline"
7636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7639 \begin_inset space ~
7643 \begin_inset space ~
7648 ) to start a new line in an
7655 \begin_inset space ~
7663 \begin_layout Subsection
7667 \begin_layout Standard
7668 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7669 or list of references.
7671 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7676 \begin_inset Index idx
7679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7688 \begin_layout Standard
7693 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7694 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7695 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7696 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7710 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7711 The book document classes ignores the
7715 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7719 in a letter document class.
7722 \begin_layout Standard
7727 environment does several things for you.
7728 First, it puts the centered label
7729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7737 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7739 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7740 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7741 the subsequent text.
7742 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7744 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7749 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7753 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7754 The new paragraph will still be in the
7759 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7760 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7764 \begin_inset Float figure
7769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7771 \begin_inset Graphics
7772 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7780 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7785 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7806 \begin_layout Standard
7807 We would love to demonstrate the
7811 environment, but since this document is in the
7812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7819 class, we can't do this.
7820 We inserted it therefore as figure
7821 \begin_inset space ~
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7827 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7832 If you have never heard of an
7833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7840 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7845 \begin_inset Index idx
7848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7857 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7864 \begin_layout Standard
7869 environment is used to list references.
7870 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7871 only use it at the end of the document.
7883 \begin_layout Standard
7884 When you first open a
7888 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7889 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7905 depending on the document class.
7906 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7907 Each paragraph of the
7911 environment is a bibliography entry.
7916 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7917 Each new paragraph is still in the
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7926 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7928 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7930 handling, have a look at section
7931 \begin_inset space ~
7935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7937 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7944 \begin_layout Subsection
7945 Special Environments
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7950 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7951 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7959 \begin_inset Index idx
7962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7972 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7985 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7987 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7992 key as a fixed whitespace.
7996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8009 \begin_inset space ~
8014 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8032 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8035 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8038 arg "newline-insert newline"
8055 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8056 So, when you finish using the
8061 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8062 Also, you can nest the
8067 environment inside of others.
8070 \begin_layout Standard
8071 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
8078 arg "newline-insert newline"
8081 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8086 \begin_inset space \space{}
8096 arg "newline-insert newline"
8102 \begin_layout Itemize
8106 arg "newline-insert newline"
8116 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8122 \begin_layout Itemize
8123 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8124 You must put at least one
8128 in any line you want blank.
8129 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8133 \begin_layout Itemize
8134 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8138 since that will insert
8143 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8146 arg "self-insert \""
8152 \begin_layout Standard
8156 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8160 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8173 printf("Hello World!
8178 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8187 This is just the standard
8188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8199 \begin_layout Standard
8205 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8207 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8208 as if you used a typewriter.
8209 \begin_inset Index idx
8212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8213 Paragraph environments|)
8218 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8221 Program Code Listings
8226 \begin_inset space ~
8234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8238 \begin_inset Index idx
8241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8250 \begin_layout Standard
8255 environment is similar to the
8260 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8261 computer console text.
8266 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8280 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8281 you can have empty lines.
8294 \begin_layout Itemize
8295 have a certain language and a text style
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8299 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8300 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8301 and \SpecialChar TeX
8305 \begin_layout Standard
8306 Because of these properties
8310 works like a typewriter.
8314 \begin_layout Verbatim
8318 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 The following 2 lines are empty:
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8333 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8338 \begin_layout Standard
8343 environment is identical to
8347 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8348 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8359 \begin_layout Section
8360 Nesting Environments
8361 \begin_inset Index idx
8364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8365 Nesting ! Environments
8371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8380 \begin_layout Subsection
8384 \begin_layout Standard
8386 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8388 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8390 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8392 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8404 \begin_layout Enumerate
8408 \begin_layout Enumerate
8413 \begin_layout Enumerate
8417 \begin_layout Enumerate
8422 \begin_layout Enumerate
8426 \begin_layout Standard
8427 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8428 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8430 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8432 \begin_inset space ~
8436 \begin_inset space ~
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8453 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8455 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8458 arg "depth-increment"
8464 arg "depth-decrement"
8478 arg "depth-increment"
8484 arg "depth-decrement"
8488 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8489 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8493 \begin_layout Standard
8494 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8495 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8496 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8497 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8498 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8501 \begin_layout Standard
8502 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8504 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8506 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8509 \begin_layout Subsection
8510 What You Can and Can't Nest
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8515 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8518 \begin_layout Standard
8519 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8520 than a simple yes or no.
8521 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 Completely unnestable
8528 \begin_layout Itemize
8529 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8534 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8539 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8540 environments have them:
8543 \begin_layout Description
8544 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8545 Can't nest into them.
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8580 \begin_layout Description
8582 \begin_inset space ~
8585 Nestable You can nest them.
8586 You can nest other things into them.
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Description
8653 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8654 You can't nest anything into them.
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_inset space ~
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Standard
8754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8762 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8772 \begin_inset space ~
8775 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8776 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8777 nested section headings violate this.
8785 \begin_layout Subsection
8786 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8787 \begin_inset Index idx
8790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8799 \begin_layout Standard
8800 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8801 affected by nesting anyhow.
8805 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8813 \begin_layout Itemize
8817 \begin_layout Standard
8819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8827 Figures and tables in
8831 are not affected by this.
8836 Have a look at section
8837 \begin_inset space ~
8841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8843 reference "sec:Floats"
8847 for more information about
8854 \begin_layout Standard
8856 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8857 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8862 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8870 of its own, it behaves just like a
8871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8878 paragraph environment.
8879 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8884 Here's an example with a table:
8887 \begin_layout Enumerate
8892 \begin_layout Enumerate
8893 This is (a) and it's nested.
8897 \begin_layout Standard
8898 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8904 \begin_layout Standard
8906 \begin_inset Tabular
8907 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8908 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8994 \begin_layout Standard
8995 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9002 \begin_layout Enumerate
9004 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9008 \begin_layout Enumerate
9012 \begin_layout Standard
9013 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9022 This is (a) and it's nested.
9026 \begin_layout Standard
9027 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9033 \begin_layout Standard
9035 \begin_inset Tabular
9036 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9037 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9123 \begin_layout Standard
9124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9130 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9140 \begin_layout Enumerate
9144 \begin_layout Standard
9145 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9153 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9156 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 This is (a) and it's nested.
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9174 \begin_inset Tabular
9175 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9176 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9263 \begin_layout Standard
9264 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9270 \begin_layout Enumerate
9272 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9279 \begin_layout Enumerate
9283 \begin_layout Standard
9284 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9290 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9291 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9295 \begin_layout Subsection
9296 Usage and General Features
9299 \begin_layout Standard
9300 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9301 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9310 is the innermost possible depth.
9311 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9314 \begin_layout Enumerate
9315 level #1 – outermost
9319 \begin_layout Enumerate
9324 \begin_layout Enumerate
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Itemize
9339 \begin_layout Itemize
9348 \begin_layout Standard
9349 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9350 both of them in the example.
9351 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9361 For example, if we tried to nest another
9366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9373 , we would get errors.
9376 \begin_layout Subsection
9378 \begin_inset Index idx
9381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9390 \begin_layout Standard
9391 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9392 We have several examples of nested environments.
9393 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9398 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9401 \begin_layout Labeling
9402 \labelwidthstring MMM
9403 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9412 \begin_layout Labeling
9413 \labelwidthstring MMM
9414 #2-a This is level #2.
9415 We created it by using
9418 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9424 arg "depth-increment"
9431 \begin_layout Labeling
9432 \labelwidthstring MMM
9433 #3-a This is level #3.
9434 This time, we just enter
9441 arg "depth-increment"
9445 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9449 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9455 arg "depth-increment"
9462 \begin_layout Standard
9467 environment, nested inside of
9468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9476 So, it's at level #4.
9477 We did this by entering
9480 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9486 arg "depth-increment"
9489 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9494 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9510 \begin_layout Standard
9515 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9518 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9524 \begin_layout Labeling
9525 \labelwidthstring MMM
9526 #4-a This is level #4.
9530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9533 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9538 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9542 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9547 keep nesting things inside
9548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9559 \begin_layout Labeling
9560 \labelwidthstring MMM
9561 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9566 \begin_layout Labeling
9567 \labelwidthstring MMM
9568 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9569 and this is level #6.
9570 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #5-b Back to level #5.
9580 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9586 arg "depth-decrement"
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9598 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9604 arg "depth-decrement"
9607 , we're back at level #4.
9611 \begin_layout Labeling
9612 \labelwidthstring MMM
9613 #3-b Back to level #3.
9614 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9620 #2-b Back to level #2.
9625 \begin_layout Labeling
9626 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9628 After this sentence, we will enter
9632 and change the paragraph environment back to
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9640 We could have also used the
9656 environment in place of the
9661 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9665 Example 2: Inheritance
9668 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9669 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9672 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 arg "depth-increment"
9685 \begin_inset Newline newline
9688 which, we will change to the
9696 \begin_layout Enumerate
9701 environment, at level #2.
9704 \begin_layout Enumerate
9705 Notice how the nested
9709 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9713 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9717 \begin_layout Standard
9718 We ended this example by entering
9723 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9727 and reset the nesting depth by using
9730 arg "depth-decrement"
9736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9737 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9746 \begin_inset Argument 1
9749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9750 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9758 \begin_layout Enumerate
9759 This is level #1, in an
9763 paragraph environment.
9764 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9768 \begin_layout Enumerate
9773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9779 arg "depth-increment"
9783 Now, what happens if we nest an
9787 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9788 label be? An asterisk?
9792 \begin_layout Itemize
9802 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9803 So, its label is a bullet.
9804 (We got here by using
9807 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9813 arg "depth-increment"
9816 , then changing the environment to
9824 \begin_layout Itemize
9825 Here's level #4, produced using
9828 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9834 arg "depth-increment"
9838 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9843 \begin_layout Enumerate
9846 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9851 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9855 , because we are in the
9863 environment (that is, it is an
9878 \begin_layout Enumerate
9883 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9884 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9888 \begin_layout Enumerate
9889 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9892 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9895 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9898 \begin_layout Enumerate
9902 arg "depth-decrement"
9905 to decrease the depth after the next
9908 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9915 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9925 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9929 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9939 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9944 reset the counter for the label.
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9958 arg "depth-decrement"
9961 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9962 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9963 into the twofold-nested
9971 \begin_layout Enumerate
9972 The same thing happens if we do another
9975 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9981 arg "depth-decrement"
9984 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9987 \begin_layout Standard
9988 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9993 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10004 The number of other
10008 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10015 The same rule applies for the
10019 environment, as well.
10022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10023 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10026 \begin_layout Enumerate
10027 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10028 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10029 the same detail with how we did it.
10038 \begin_layout Standard
10046 arg "depth-increment"
10053 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10054 the example in parentheses someplace.
10055 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10056 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10057 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10061 \begin_layout Enumerate
10066 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10070 \begin_layout Verse
10071 Now we will add verse.
10072 \begin_inset Newline newline
10075 It will get much worse.
10076 \begin_inset Newline newline
10086 arg "depth-increment"
10096 \begin_layout Verse
10097 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10098 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10108 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10116 \begin_layout Verse
10117 Here comes a table:
10121 \begin_layout Standard
10122 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10128 \begin_layout Standard
10130 \begin_inset Tabular
10131 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10132 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10219 \begin_layout Verse
10223 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10233 arg "depth-increment"
10239 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 \begin_inset Newline newline
10253 arg "depth-decrement"
10260 \begin_layout Enumerate
10265 : level #1) This is another item.
10266 Note that selecting a
10270 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10271 3 times to put the table inside the
10279 \begin_layout Quotation
10280 We're now ending the
10284 list and changing to
10289 We're still at level #1.
10290 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10291 The next set of paragraphs is a
10292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10299 We will nest both the
10306 \begin_inset space ~
10311 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10315 for the letter body.
10319 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10322 to preserve the depth.
10323 Remember that you need to use
10326 arg "newline-insert newline"
10329 to create multiple lines inside the
10336 \begin_inset space ~
10346 \begin_layout Right Address
10348 \begin_inset Newline newline
10351 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10352 \begin_inset Newline newline
10358 \begin_layout Address
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10366 \begin_layout Quotation
10367 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10371 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10372 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10373 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10374 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10375 as soon as possible.
10376 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10379 \begin_layout Quotation
10380 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10381 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10382 with your order, along with payment.
10385 \begin_layout Quotation
10386 We thank you again for your patience.
10389 \begin_layout Address
10391 \begin_inset Newline newline
10398 \begin_layout Quotation
10399 That ends that example!
10402 \begin_layout Standard
10403 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10404 gives you a lot of power with just
10406 We could have easily nested an
10427 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10430 \begin_layout Subsection
10432 \begin_inset Index idx
10435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 Nesting ! Separation
10442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10444 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10451 \begin_layout Standard
10452 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10454 For example you need two different enumerations:
10457 \begin_layout Enumerate
10462 \begin_layout Enumerate
10467 \begin_layout Enumerate
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10472 \begin_inset Separator plain
10478 \begin_layout Itemize
10484 \begin_layout Standard
10485 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Enumerate
10503 \begin_layout Standard
10504 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10505 list item and use the menu
10507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10508 Start New Environment
10511 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10512 ) and behind it the new list.
10515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10516 Start New Parent Environment
10518 only appears if the item is nested.
10519 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10523 \begin_layout Standard
10524 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10525 (red arrow in LyX).
10526 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10527 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10534 arg "paragraph-break"
10541 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10544 \begin_layout Section
10545 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10546 \begin_inset Index idx
10549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10560 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10562 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10563 be broken at the end of a line.
10564 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10568 \begin_layout Subsection
10570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10572 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10577 \begin_inset Index idx
10580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10589 \begin_layout Standard
10590 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10591 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10592 ) not to break the line at
10594 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10597 \begin_layout Quote
10598 Further documentation is given in section
10599 \begin_inset Newline newline
10603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10605 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10638 A protected space is set with
10640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10641 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10643 \begin_inset space ~
10651 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10657 \begin_layout Subsection
10659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10661 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10666 \begin_inset Index idx
10669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10670 Spacing ! Horizontal
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10682 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10686 The length units are listed in Appendix
10687 \begin_inset space ~
10691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10693 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10704 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10709 \begin_inset Index idx
10712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10713 Spaces ! Inter-word
10721 \begin_layout Standard
10722 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10723 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10724 at the ends of sentences.
10725 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10726 automatically takes care about this.
10727 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10728 followed by a period; see section
10729 \begin_inset space ~
10733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10735 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10740 To insert a normal space, select
10742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10743 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10745 \begin_inset space ~
10753 arg "space-insert normal"
10759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10763 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10768 \begin_inset Index idx
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10780 \begin_layout Standard
10782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10789 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10798 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10799 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10800 inside abbreviations:
10803 \begin_layout Quote
10805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10809 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10812 \begin_layout Standard
10813 or between values and units.
10814 Compare for example this:
10815 \begin_inset Newline newline
10819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10823 \begin_inset Newline newline
10826 10 kg (normal space
10829 \begin_layout Standard
10830 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10833 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 \begin_inset space ~
10843 arg "space-insert thin"
10849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can also insert the following space types:
10857 \begin_layout Description
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10866 space A line with a
10867 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10871 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10875 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10878 negative thin space between the arrows.
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative medium space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative thick space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10951 \begin_inset space ~
10955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10958 em) space between the arrows.
10961 \begin_layout Description
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10975 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10979 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10983 \begin_inset space ~
10987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10990 em) space between the arrows.
10993 \begin_layout Description
10995 \begin_inset space ~
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11007 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11011 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11015 \begin_inset space ~
11019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11022 em) space between the arrows.
11025 \begin_layout Description
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11047 cm space between the arrows.
11050 \begin_layout Standard
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11058 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11062 lists the different space sizes.
11065 \begin_layout Standard
11066 \begin_inset Float table
11071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11072 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11077 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11081 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11091 \begin_inset Tabular
11092 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11093 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11370 \begin_inset Index idx
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11382 \begin_layout Standard
11383 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11384 feature for adding extra space
11385 in a uniform fashion.
11386 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11387 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11388 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11389 equally between themselves.
11392 \begin_layout Standard
11393 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11396 \begin_layout Quote
11398 This is on the left side
11399 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11402 This is on the right
11405 \begin_layout Quote
11408 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11412 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11418 \begin_layout Quote
11421 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11425 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11429 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11435 \begin_layout Standard
11436 That was an example in the
11442 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11453 is one in a standard paragraph.
11454 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11458 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11462 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11465 \begin_inset space ~
11470 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11475 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11479 \begin_inset space ~
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11487 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11554 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11558 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11560 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11561 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11565 option in the space dialog.
11573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11577 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11582 \begin_inset Index idx
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11594 \begin_layout Standard
11595 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11596 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11599 \begin_layout Standard
11600 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11603 What is correct English?:
11604 \begin_inset Newline newline
11608 \begin_inset Newline newline
11612 \begin_inset space ~
11615 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11635 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11646 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11652 \begin_layout Standard
11654 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11659 \begin_inset space ~
11663 \begin_inset space ~
11667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11671 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11674 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11678 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11704 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11705 That is why it is named
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11714 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11715 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11719 \begin_layout Subsection
11721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11723 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11728 \begin_inset Index idx
11731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11740 \begin_layout Standard
11741 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11744 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11746 \begin_inset space ~
11752 There you find the following sizes:
11755 \begin_layout Standard
11768 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11769 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11774 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11777 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 \begin_inset space ~
11785 \begin_inset Index idx
11788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11789 Document ! Settings
11794 for the paragraph separation.
11795 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11812 \begin_inset Index idx
11815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11821 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11822 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11827 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11828 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11837 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 s are described in section
11847 \begin_inset space ~
11851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11853 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11862 If there are several
11866 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11867 You can therefore use
11871 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11874 \begin_layout Standard
11879 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11880 \begin_inset space ~
11884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11886 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11893 \begin_layout Standard
11894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11904 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11905 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11917 \begin_layout Subsection
11918 Paragraph Alignment
11919 \begin_inset Index idx
11922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11923 Paragraph ! Alignment
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11932 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11934 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11937 dialog (toolbar button
11940 arg "layout-paragraph"
11944 There are five possibilities:
11947 \begin_layout Itemize
11955 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11961 \begin_layout Itemize
11969 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12017 \begin_layout Standard
12018 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12019 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12020 the left and right margins.
12021 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12026 This paragraph is right aligned,
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12031 this one is centered,
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 this one is left aligned.
12039 \begin_layout Subsection
12041 \begin_inset Index idx
12044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12045 Page breaks ! Forced
12051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12053 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12061 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12062 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12063 force a page break where you want one.
12064 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12065 is good at page breaking.
12066 Only if you use a lot of
12070 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12071 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12074 \begin_layout Standard
12075 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12076 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12080 have to change the page breaking.
12083 \begin_layout Standard
12084 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12086 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12089 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12097 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12100 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 \begin_inset space ~
12107 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12109 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12110 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12115 at the top of a page.
12116 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12118 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12119 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12120 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12124 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12128 to learn more about
12135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12139 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12144 \begin_inset Index idx
12147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12148 Page breaks ! Clear
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12157 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12158 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12159 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12160 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12161 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12164 \begin_layout Standard
12165 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12168 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 \begin_inset space ~
12176 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12179 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12181 \begin_inset space ~
12185 \begin_inset space ~
12190 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12191 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12194 \begin_layout Subsection
12196 \begin_inset Index idx
12199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12208 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12216 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12218 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12221 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 \begin_inset space ~
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12235 arg "newline-insert newline"
12239 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12242 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 \begin_inset space ~
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12256 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12259 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12261 This is useful to avoid
12262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12269 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12272 \begin_layout Standard
12273 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12274 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12276 very good at line breaking.
12277 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12278 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12285 reference "sec:Quote"
12290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12292 reference "sec:Verse"
12297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12299 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12306 \begin_layout Subsection
12308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12310 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12315 \begin_inset Index idx
12318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12327 \begin_layout Standard
12329 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12340 \begin_layout Standard
12344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 \begin_inset space ~
12352 you can insert horizontal lines.
12353 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12354 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12355 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12358 \begin_layout Standard
12360 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12371 \begin_layout Section
12372 Characters and Symbols
12375 \begin_layout Standard
12376 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12377 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12378 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12386 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12390 for information on how this is done.
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12394 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12399 dialog via the menu
12401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12402 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12408 \begin_layout Standard
12409 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12417 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12418 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12420 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12428 \begin_layout Section
12429 Fonts and Text Styles
12430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12432 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12439 \begin_layout Subsection
12441 \begin_inset Index idx
12444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12453 \begin_layout Standard
12454 There are two types of fonts:
12457 \begin_layout Description
12459 \begin_inset space ~
12463 \begin_inset Index idx
12466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12472 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12477 characters) in the font.
12478 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12479 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12480 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12481 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12482 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12483 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12484 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12485 \begin_inset Newline newline
12488 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12489 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12490 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12491 sizes than at small ones.
12492 \begin_inset Newline newline
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12514 \begin_layout Description
12516 \begin_inset space ~
12520 \begin_inset Index idx
12523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12529 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12530 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12531 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12532 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12533 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12534 image manipulation program.
12535 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12536 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12537 \begin_inset space ~
12540 pixels high up to 34
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12544 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12545 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12546 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12548 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12549 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12550 \begin_inset Newline newline
12553 Bitmap fonts are named
12556 \begin_inset space ~
12561 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12564 \begin_layout Standard
12565 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12566 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12567 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12568 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12569 use scalable fonts.
12572 \begin_layout Standard
12573 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12578 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12579 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12580 font to emphasize text, you use an
12581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12589 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12591 In \SpecialChar LyX
12592 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12596 \begin_layout Subsection
12599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12601 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12608 \begin_layout Standard
12609 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12610 used its own fonts.
12611 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12612 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12615 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12616 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12617 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12618 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12619 to a word processor.
12620 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12621 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 files are very portable across
12623 different machines.
12624 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12625 has increased a lot
12626 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12629 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12631 \begin_inset space ~
12635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12637 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12642 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 code in the document
12644 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12647 \begin_layout Standard
12648 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 engines that are also able directly
12650 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12652 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12654 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12656 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12657 that is installed on your system.
12658 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12671 es; so you might have to experiment.
12679 \begin_layout Subsection
12680 Document Font and Font size
12681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12683 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12688 \begin_inset Index idx
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 \begin_inset Index idx
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 \begin_layout Standard
12711 You can set the document fonts in the
12713 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12717 \begin_inset Index idx
12720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 Document ! Settings
12731 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12732 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12735 \begin_inset space ~
12744 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12746 \begin_inset space ~
12749 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12752 \begin_layout Standard
12757 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12758 This requires that you use
12770 as the output format, i.
12771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12775 \begin_inset space \space{}
12778 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12779 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12780 installed (see section
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12787 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12792 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12794 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12795 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12797 \begin_inset space ~
12800 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12801 cannot determine the family.
12802 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12803 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12806 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12809 \begin_layout Standard
12810 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12811 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12816 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12822 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12823 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12850 European Computer Modern
12853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12860 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12872 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12873 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12878 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12881 \begin_inset space ~
12886 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12892 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12893 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12896 \begin_layout Itemize
12900 \begin_inset space ~
12905 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12923 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12924 community in order to replace
12928 as the default font.
12929 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12930 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12933 \begin_inset space ~
12946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12947 One difference is improved kerning.
12955 \begin_layout Itemize
12959 \begin_inset space ~
12963 \begin_inset space ~
12968 fonts in (the rare) case that
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12976 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12991 Virtual means that it
12992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13003 -glyphs from other fonts.
13004 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13026 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13032 \begin_inset Index idx
13035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13037 -packages ! aeguill
13042 with the document preamble line
13043 \begin_inset Newline newline
13050 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13051 \begin_inset Newline newline
13056 will fix the guillemet problem.
13061 and that accented characters are not
13065 glyph, but built of
13069 characters, the accent and the letter.
13070 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13076 If you search for example for the French word
13077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13084 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13093 and not for the glyph
13094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13098 \begin_inset space ~
13102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13108 \begin_layout Itemize
13109 If you do not like the look of
13117 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13122 \begin_inset space ~
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13138 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13139 \begin_inset space ~
13142 serif and typewriter fonts,
13146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13147 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13163 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13168 \begin_inset space \space{}
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space \space{}
13186 \begin_inset space ~
13194 \begin_inset space ~
13204 but you can also select your own.
13205 \begin_inset Newline newline
13208 The differences between roman,
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13220 fonts are explained in section
13221 \begin_inset space ~
13225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13227 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13232 \begin_inset Newline newline
13238 \begin_inset space ~
13243 was originally designed for newspapers.
13244 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13245 into the small newspaper columns.
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13254 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13257 \begin_layout Standard
13258 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13271 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13276 depends on the class you are using.
13277 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13280 \begin_layout Standard
13281 Note that the font size is the
13286 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13287 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13288 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13289 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13292 \begin_inset space ~
13298 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13299 \begin_inset space ~
13303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13305 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13312 \begin_layout Standard
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13321 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13323 \begin_inset space ~
13326 serif or typewriter.
13331 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13341 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13344 \begin_layout Standard
13349 LaTeX font encoding
13351 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13352 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13358 \begin_inset Index idx
13361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 -packages ! fontenc
13369 \begin_inset space ~
13373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13375 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13380 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13381 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13388 \begin_layout Standard
13389 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13391 Use Old Style Figures
13395 Use True Small Caps
13398 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13401 Use Old Style Figures
13403 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13405 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13413 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13417 Use True Small Caps
13419 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13420 of scaled capitals.
13421 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13422 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13425 \begin_layout Standard
13430 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13431 a font to display the script characters.
13435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13436 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13442 \begin_inset Index idx
13445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13452 So this has no effect for the document language
13466 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13478 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13483 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13484 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13486 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13491 dialog, see section
13492 \begin_inset space ~
13496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13498 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13510 \begin_layout Subsection
13514 \begin_layout Standard
13515 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13516 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13518 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13519 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13520 choose a math font in the dialog
13522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13526 \begin_inset Index idx
13529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13530 Document ! Settings
13536 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13537 automatically selects a math font.
13538 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13539 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13548 \begin_inset space ~
13554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13559 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13560 document font is available.
13563 \begin_layout Standard
13564 Note that the math font will not be used for
13568 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13574 or by the insertion of the command
13581 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13582 \begin_inset space ~
13586 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13587 while the math characters do not.
13589 \begin_inset space ~
13592 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13595 \begin_inset space ~
13603 \begin_inset space ~
13608 in the document font settings.
13611 \begin_layout Standard
13612 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13613 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13614 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13615 font (in most cases
13616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13631 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13632 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13640 \begin_inset space ~
13646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13652 \begin_layout Subsection
13653 Using Different Character Styles
13654 \begin_inset Index idx
13657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13664 \begin_inset Index idx
13667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \begin_layout Standard
13677 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13678 automatically changes the character style for certain
13679 paragraph environments.
13681 supports two character styles,
13690 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13694 \begin_layout Standard
13699 style, do one of the following:
13702 \begin_layout Itemize
13703 click on the toolbar button
13712 \begin_layout Itemize
13713 use the key binding
13722 \begin_layout Standard
13723 These commands are all toggles.
13728 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13731 \begin_layout Standard
13732 One typically uses the
13736 style for proper names.
13738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13745 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13753 \begin_layout Standard
13754 A more widely used character style is the
13759 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13766 \begin_layout Itemize
13767 clicking on the toolbar button
13776 \begin_layout Itemize
13777 using the keybindings
13786 \begin_layout Standard
13791 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13793 use a different font.
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13797 We've been using the
13801 style all over the place in this document.
13802 Here's one more example:
13805 \begin_layout Quotation
13808 Do not overuse character styles!
13811 \begin_layout Standard
13812 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13813 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13814 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13815 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13819 \begin_layout Standard
13820 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13830 \begin_inset space ~
13833 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13839 arg "dialog-show character"
13845 \begin_layout Subsection
13846 Fine-Tuning with the
13851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13853 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13858 \begin_inset Index idx
13861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13873 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13874 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13875 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13876 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13877 from ordinary dialog.
13880 \begin_layout Standard
13881 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13882 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13883 \begin_inset Newline newline
13886 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13887 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13890 \begin_layout Standard
13891 To use custom character styles, open the
13893 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13895 \begin_inset space ~
13898 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13901 dialog or press the toolbar button
13904 arg "dialog-show character"
13908 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13909 font property that you can choose.
13910 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13913 \begin_inset space ~
13918 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13923 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13924 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13925 environments all at once.
13928 \begin_layout Standard
13929 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13932 \begin_inset space ~
13944 \begin_layout Labeling
13945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13959 The possible options are:
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13969 This is the Roman font family.
13970 Normally a serif font.
13971 It's also the default family.
13981 \begin_layout Labeling
13982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13986 \begin_inset space ~
13993 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14005 \begin_layout Labeling
14006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14013 This is the Typewriter font family.
14019 arg "font-typewriter"
14028 \begin_layout Labeling
14029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This corresponds to the print weight.
14039 \begin_layout Labeling
14040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14045 This is the Medium font series.
14046 It's also the default series.
14049 \begin_layout Labeling
14050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 This is the Bold font series.
14070 \begin_layout Labeling
14071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14076 As the name implies.
14081 \begin_layout Labeling
14082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14087 This is the Upright font shape.
14088 It's also the default shape.
14091 \begin_layout Labeling
14092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14106 s the Italic font shape
14112 \begin_layout Labeling
14113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14120 This is the Slanted font shape
14122 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14123 , this is different from italic).
14126 \begin_layout Labeling
14127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14131 \begin_inset space ~
14138 This is the Small caps font shape
14145 \begin_layout Labeling
14146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14151 Alters the text color.
14152 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14161 , which means that the document default color set in
14163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14164 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14170 \begin_inset space ~
14175 is used, you can choose between
14252 \begin_inset Index idx
14255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14264 \begin_layout Labeling
14265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14270 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14271 the language of the document.
14272 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14273 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14275 \begin_inset Newline newline
14278 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14280 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14281 When using the spell checking (see section
14282 \begin_inset space ~
14286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14288 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14292 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14295 \begin_layout Labeling
14296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14301 Alters the size of the font.
14302 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14303 proportional to the document font size.
14304 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14305 the details, but a general description of what
14311 \begin_layout Labeling
14312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14333 arg "font-size tiny"
14339 \begin_layout Labeling
14340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14361 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14367 \begin_layout Labeling
14368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14389 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14395 \begin_layout Labeling
14396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14417 arg "font-size small"
14423 \begin_layout Labeling
14424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14438 It's also the default size.
14442 arg "font-size normal"
14448 \begin_layout Labeling
14449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14470 arg "font-size large"
14476 \begin_layout Labeling
14477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14498 arg "font-size larger"
14504 \begin_layout Labeling
14505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14526 arg "font-size largest"
14532 \begin_layout Labeling
14533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14554 arg "font-size huge"
14560 \begin_layout Labeling
14561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14582 arg "font-size giant"
14588 \begin_layout Labeling
14589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14594 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14614 arg "font-size increase"
14620 \begin_layout Labeling
14621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14626 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14646 arg "font-size decrease"
14653 \begin_layout Standard
14658 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14659 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14661 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14662 — use those instead.
14663 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14666 \begin_layout Labeling
14667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14672 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14677 \begin_layout Labeling
14678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14685 This is text with emphasize on
14688 This might seem like the same as
14692 , but it is actually a bit different.
14698 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14700 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14703 \begin_layout Labeling
14704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14711 This is text with Underbar on.
14717 arg "font-underline"
14723 \begin_inset Newline newline
14728 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14729 when you could not change fonts.
14730 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14731 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14732 because some people
14736 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14739 \begin_layout Labeling
14740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14751 This is text with Double underbar on.
14757 arg "font-underunderline"
14761 \begin_inset Newline newline
14764 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14765 about double underbar.
14768 \begin_layout Labeling
14769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14786 arg "font-underwave"
14790 \begin_inset Newline newline
14793 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14794 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14797 \begin_layout Labeling
14798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14805 This is text with Strikeout on.
14811 arg "font-strikeout"
14815 \begin_inset Newline newline
14818 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14819 changed in the meantime.
14822 \begin_layout Labeling
14823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14830 This is text with Noun on.
14837 , this is a logical attribute.
14838 Normally it's equivalent to
14841 \begin_inset space ~
14850 \begin_layout Standard
14851 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14852 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14854 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14856 \begin_inset space ~
14859 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14865 arg "dialog-show character"
14868 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14869 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14872 arg "textstyle-apply"
14876 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14880 \begin_layout Standard
14881 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14888 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14889 (suppose you just set the shape to
14890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14908 \begin_inset space ~
14920 \begin_layout Standard
14921 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14929 \begin_inset space ~
14941 \begin_layout Itemize
14947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14954 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 \begin_inset Newline newline
14976 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14990 \begin_inset Note Note
14993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14994 For more on phantoms see section
14995 \begin_inset space ~
14999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15001 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15011 \begin_inset Newline newline
15017 \begin_layout Itemize
15022 fonts use characters with serifs.
15023 These are the small
15024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15031 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15032 The following example shows the difference:
15033 \begin_inset Newline newline
15037 \begin_inset Newline newline
15042 text without serifs
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15048 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15049 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15056 \begin_layout Itemize
15061 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15062 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15063 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15066 \begin_layout Standard
15067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15074 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15075 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15078 \begin_inset space ~
15083 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15084 the property to be removed.
15085 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15086 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15087 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15106 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15114 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15118 \begin_inset space ~
15123 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15134 If you, for example, set
15135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15153 \begin_inset space ~
15158 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15167 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15170 \begin_layout Standard
15171 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15172 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15175 \begin_layout Section
15176 Printing and Previewing
15179 \begin_layout Subsection
15183 \begin_layout Standard
15184 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15185 using \SpecialChar LyX
15186 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15187 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15188 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15189 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15191 Additional Features
15196 \begin_layout Standard
15198 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15201 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15202 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15203 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15206 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15207 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15208 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15209 to turn your writing into printable output.
15210 This happens in two stages:
15213 \begin_layout Enumerate
15214 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15215 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15217 a file with the extension,
15218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15232 \begin_layout Enumerate
15233 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15234 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15235 to use the commands in the
15239 file to produce printable output.
15242 \begin_layout Subsection
15243 Output file formats
15244 \begin_inset Index idx
15247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15256 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15264 Simple text (ASCII)
15265 \begin_inset Index idx
15268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15269 File formats ! ASCII
15277 \begin_layout Standard
15278 This file type has the extension
15279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15291 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15295 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15302 \begin_layout Standard
15303 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15305 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15306 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15308 \begin_inset space ~
15314 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15315 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15316 bibliography (section
15317 \begin_inset space ~
15321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15323 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15328 If your document includes such material, use
15330 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15331 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 \begin_inset space ~
15337 \begin_inset space ~
15341 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset space ~
15359 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15360 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15366 \begin_inset Index idx
15369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15370 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15379 \begin_layout Standard
15380 This file type has the extension
15381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15392 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15395 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15396 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 -Errors or to process it manually
15398 with console commands.
15399 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15400 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15401 's temporary directory whenever you
15402 view or export your document.
15405 \begin_layout Standard
15406 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 -file using the menu
15409 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15410 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15414 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15415 export variants are explained in section
15416 \begin_inset space ~
15420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15422 reference "subsec:Export"
15429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15431 \begin_inset Index idx
15434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15443 \begin_layout Standard
15444 This file type has the extension
15445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15465 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15466 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15467 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15471 \begin_layout Standard
15472 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15473 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15474 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15475 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15476 when you view the DVI.
15477 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15481 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15483 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15484 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15489 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15490 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 \begin_inset space ~
15498 The latter option uses the program
15500 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15506 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15509 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15510 font access (see section
15511 \begin_inset space ~
15515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15517 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15522 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15523 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15530 \begin_inset Index idx
15533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15534 File formats ! PostScript
15542 \begin_layout Standard
15543 This file type has the extension
15544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15556 PostScript was developed by the company
15560 as a printer language.
15561 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15563 PostScript can be seen as a
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 programming language
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15576 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15583 \begin_inset Index idx
15586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15588 -packages ! pstricks
15598 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15601 \begin_layout Standard
15602 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15606 Encapsulated PostScript
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15610 (EPS, file extension
15611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 As \SpecialChar LyX
15624 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15625 convert them in the background to EPS.
15626 If, for example, you have 50
15627 \begin_inset space ~
15630 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15632 \begin_inset space ~
15635 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15636 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15638 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15639 EPS to avoid this problem.
15642 \begin_layout Standard
15643 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15645 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15646 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15652 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15654 \begin_inset Index idx
15657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15664 \begin_inset Index idx
15667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 \begin_layout Standard
15677 This file type has the extension
15678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 Portable Document Format
15695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15702 was derived from PostScript.
15703 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15712 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15713 looks exactly the same.
15716 \begin_layout Standard
15717 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15725 (JPG, file extension
15726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 Portable Network Graphics
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15757 (PNG, file extension
15758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15771 converts them in the
15772 background to one of these formats.
15773 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15774 will slow down your workflow.
15775 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15778 \begin_layout Standard
15779 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15781 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15787 \begin_layout Description
15789 \begin_inset space ~
15792 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15796 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15799 \begin_layout Description
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15808 ) This uses the program
15810 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15813 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15816 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15819 is a new engine, derived from
15823 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15824 access (see section
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15831 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15836 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15837 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15842 \begin_layout Description
15844 \begin_inset space ~
15851 ) This uses the program
15856 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15862 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15863 font access (see section
15864 \begin_inset space ~
15868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15870 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15875 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15876 vertically written Japanese.
15879 \begin_layout Description
15881 \begin_inset space ~
15884 (cropped) This is the same as
15887 \begin_inset space ~
15892 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15893 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15894 to generate good-looking
15895 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15898 \begin_layout Description
15900 \begin_inset space ~
15903 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15907 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15911 \begin_layout Description
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15916 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15920 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15921 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15925 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15926 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15929 \begin_layout Standard
15933 \begin_inset space ~
15942 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15943 works without problems.
15944 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15945 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15949 \begin_inset space ~
15957 \begin_inset space ~
15962 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15972 \begin_inset Index idx
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15976 FileFormats ! XHTML
15982 \begin_inset Index idx
15985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15994 \begin_layout Standard
15995 This file type has the extension
15996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16008 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16009 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16010 When \SpecialChar LyX
16011 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16012 suitable for the purpose.
16013 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16019 between different formats, which are described in section
16021 Math Output in XHTML
16026 \begin_inset space ~
16034 \begin_layout Standard
16035 XHTML output remains
16036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16043 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16044 features are supported yet.
16048 and the World Wide Web
16052 Additional Features
16054 manual, for more information.
16057 \begin_layout Standard
16058 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16060 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16061 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16067 \begin_layout Subsection
16069 \begin_inset Index idx
16072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16083 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16092 or use the toolbar button
16099 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16100 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16101 \begin_inset space ~
16105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16107 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16111 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16124 Further output formats can be selected via
16126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16127 View (Other Formats)
16129 or the toolbar button
16138 \begin_layout Standard
16139 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16140 viewer window using the menu
16142 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16148 Update (Other Formats)
16153 \begin_layout Standard
16154 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16157 To have a real output, export your document.
16160 \begin_layout Section
16161 A few Words about Typography
16162 \begin_inset Index idx
16165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16174 \begin_layout Subsection
16175 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16176 \begin_inset Index idx
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 \begin_inset Index idx
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_layout Standard
16199 In \SpecialChar LyX
16201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16212 character comes in four lengths: the
16224 , and the minus sign:
16225 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16231 \begin_layout Standard
16232 \begin_inset Tabular
16233 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16234 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16235 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16236 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16267 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16307 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16334 \begin_inset space ~
16337 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16344 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16371 \begin_inset space ~
16374 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16395 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16429 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16435 \begin_layout Standard
16436 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 character multiple times in a row.
16449 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16450 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 \begin_layout Standard
16484 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16485 math mode and has a length of its own.
16486 Here are some examples:
16489 \begin_layout Enumerate
16490 line- and page-breaks
16491 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16501 \begin_layout Enumerate
16503 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16514 Oh — there's a dash.
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16530 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16540 \begin_layout Subsection
16542 \begin_inset Index idx
16545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16554 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16561 \begin_layout Standard
16562 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16563 but automatically in the output.
16564 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16570 \begin_inset Index idx
16573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16580 following the rules of the document language.
16583 \begin_layout Standard
16585 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16589 font and with unusual constructs, like
16590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16598 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16599 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16600 This is done with the menu
16602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16603 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 \begin_inset space ~
16611 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16613 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16617 \begin_layout Standard
16618 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16619 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16630 would then see the hyphen
16631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16638 as a hyphenation possibility.
16639 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16640 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16641 as described in section
16643 Prevent Hyphenation
16648 \begin_inset space ~
16656 \begin_layout Subsection
16658 \begin_inset Index idx
16661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16671 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16674 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16681 \begin_layout Standard
16682 When \SpecialChar LyX
16683 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16684 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16686 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16692 appropriate amount of space.
16693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16696 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16698 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16699 gets after another word.
16702 \begin_layout Standard
16703 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16704 not work in all cases.
16706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16717 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16718 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16721 \begin_layout Standard
16722 Here are some examples of
16726 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16729 \begin_layout Itemize
16734 \begin_layout Itemize
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16740 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16743 \begin_layout Itemize
16745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16749 this is too much space!
16752 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_layout Standard
16758 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16761 \begin_layout Standard
16762 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16765 \begin_layout Enumerate
16769 \begin_inset space ~
16774 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16775 \begin_inset space ~
16779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16781 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16786 \begin_inset Index idx
16789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16790 Spaces ! inter-word
16798 \begin_layout Enumerate
16802 \begin_inset space ~
16807 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16808 \begin_inset space ~
16812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16814 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16819 \begin_inset Index idx
16822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16831 \begin_layout Enumerate
16835 \begin_inset space ~
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16843 \begin_inset space ~
16850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16852 \begin_inset space ~
16857 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16858 This function is also bound to
16861 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16867 \begin_layout Standard
16868 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16871 \begin_layout Itemize
16873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16877 \begin_inset space \space{}
16880 this is too much space!
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16884 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16888 \begin_layout Standard
16889 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16890 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16892 will take care of this.
16895 \begin_layout Standard
16896 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16900 \begin_inset space ~
16906 feature described in the section
16908 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16913 Additional Features
16918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16924 Typography ! Quotes
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16964 \begin_layout Standard
16966 usually sets quotes correctly.
16967 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16968 and use a closing quote at the end.
16970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16978 The keyboard character,
16982 , generates this automatically.
16985 \begin_layout Standard
16986 You can specify what character the
16990 key produces using the submenu
16996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17000 \begin_inset Index idx
17003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17004 Document ! Settings
17014 There are six choices:
17017 \begin_layout Labeling
17018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17041 \begin_layout Labeling
17042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17045 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17049 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17054 Use quotes like ”this”
17057 \begin_layout Labeling
17058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17061 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17065 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17081 \begin_layout Labeling
17082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17085 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17089 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17105 \begin_layout Labeling
17106 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17109 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17113 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17119 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17123 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17129 \begin_layout Labeling
17130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17133 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17137 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17143 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17147 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17153 \begin_layout Standard
17154 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17157 arg "quote-insert single"
17163 \begin_layout Subsection
17165 \begin_inset Index idx
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17169 Typography ! Ligatures
17175 \begin_inset Index idx
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17209 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17216 \begin_layout Standard
17217 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17218 print them as single characters.
17219 These groups are known as
17224 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17225 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17227 Here are the standard ligatures:
17230 \begin_layout Itemize
17234 \begin_layout Itemize
17238 \begin_layout Itemize
17242 \begin_layout Itemize
17246 \begin_layout Itemize
17250 \begin_layout Standard
17251 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17254 \begin_layout Standard
17255 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17256 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17264 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17280 To break a ligature, use
17282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17283 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 \begin_inset space ~
17292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17303 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17320 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17328 \begin_layout Subsection
17330 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17332 \begin_inset Index idx
17335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17345 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17356 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17360 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17363 \begin_layout Description
17365 The name of the game.
17368 \begin_layout Description
17370 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17374 \begin_layout Description
17376 The \SpecialChar TeX
17377 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17381 \begin_layout Description
17382 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17383 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17387 \begin_layout Standard
17388 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17394 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17402 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17403 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17404 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17405 converges to the number
17406 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17409 : The actual version is
17410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17418 , the previous one was
17419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17430 \begin_layout Subsection
17432 \begin_inset Index idx
17435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17444 \begin_layout Standard
17445 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17446 space between two words.
17447 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17457 for units use the menu
17459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17460 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 \begin_inset space ~
17470 arg "space-insert thin"
17476 \begin_layout Standard
17477 Here is an example to show the differences:
17480 \begin_layout Standard
17481 \begin_inset Tabular
17482 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17483 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17484 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17485 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17492 \begin_inset space ~
17496 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17508 space between number and unit
17515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17524 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17536 half space between number and unit
17549 \begin_layout Subsection
17551 \begin_inset Index idx
17554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17555 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17563 \begin_layout Standard
17564 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17566 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17567 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17568 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17569 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17570 These bits of text became known as
17581 \begin_layout Standard
17582 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17583 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17584 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17585 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17586 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17587 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17588 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17589 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17590 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17591 \begin_inset Newline newline
17599 \begin_inset Newline newline
17607 \begin_inset Newline newline
17610 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17611 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17612 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17614 \begin_inset space ~
17618 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17620 key "latexcompanion"
17625 \begin_inset space ~
17629 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17635 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17636 's page break mechanism.
17639 \begin_layout Chapter
17640 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17643 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17660 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17663 \begin_layout Section
17665 \begin_inset Index idx
17668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17684 \begin_layout Standard
17686 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17689 \begin_layout Description
17692 \begin_inset space ~
17695 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17696 \begin_inset Newline newline
17700 \begin_inset Note Note
17703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17704 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17712 \begin_layout Description
17713 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17714 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17715 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17718 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17719 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17721 \begin_inset space ~
17727 \begin_inset Newline newline
17731 \begin_inset Note Comment
17734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17735 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17744 \begin_layout Description
17746 \begin_inset space ~
17749 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17750 set in the document settings under
17752 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17754 \begin_inset space ~
17760 \begin_inset Newline newline
17764 \begin_inset Newline newline
17768 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17777 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17778 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17783 of a comment that appears in the output.
17789 \begin_inset Newline newline
17793 \begin_inset Newline newline
17796 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17799 \begin_layout Standard
17800 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17812 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17815 \begin_layout Section
17817 \begin_inset Index idx
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17829 name "sec:Footnotes"
17836 \begin_layout Standard
17838 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17844 or the toolbar button
17847 arg "footnote-insert"
17859 \begin_inset Graphics
17860 filename clipart/footnote.png
17869 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17870 's representation of your footnote.
17880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17899 label, the box will
17903 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17904 Clicking on the box label again will close
17917 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17918 and click on the footnote
17933 \begin_layout Standard
17934 Here is an example footnote:
17942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17943 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17951 \begin_layout Standard
17952 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17953 position where the footnote box is placed.
17954 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17955 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17956 according to the document class.
17958 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17959 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17965 ey are described in the
17968 \begin_inset space ~
17976 \begin_layout Section
17978 \begin_inset Index idx
17981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17990 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17997 \begin_layout Standard
17998 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18000 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18004 \begin_inset space ~
18009 or the toolbar button
18012 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18038 appearing within your text.
18039 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18040 's representation of your margin
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18050 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18054 \begin_inset Marginal
18057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18059 This is a marginal note.
18067 \begin_layout Standard
18068 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18069 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18070 pages, right on odd pages.
18073 \begin_layout Standard
18074 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18085 \begin_inset space ~
18093 \begin_layout Section
18094 Graphics and Images
18095 \begin_inset Index idx
18098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18105 \begin_inset Index idx
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18117 name "sec:Graphics"
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18126 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18129 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18138 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18141 \begin_layout Standard
18142 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18147 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18148 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18150 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18151 \begin_inset space ~
18155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18157 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18164 \begin_layout Standard
18169 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18170 of the image in the output.
18171 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18175 \begin_inset space ~
18179 \begin_inset space ~
18188 \begin_inset space ~
18192 \begin_inset space ~
18196 \begin_inset space ~
18201 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18202 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18210 \begin_layout Standard
18214 \begin_inset space ~
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18223 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18224 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18226 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18231 \begin_inset space ~
18236 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18237 with the image size is printed.
18240 \begin_layout Standard
18241 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18242 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18244 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18247 \begin_layout Standard
18249 \begin_inset Graphics
18250 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18258 \begin_layout Standard
18259 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18260 the image into a float, see section
18261 \begin_inset space ~
18265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18267 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18274 \begin_layout Subsection
18276 \begin_inset Index idx
18279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18288 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18295 \begin_layout Standard
18296 You can insert images in any known file format.
18297 But as we explained in section
18298 \begin_inset space ~
18302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18304 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18308 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18310 therefore uses the program
18314 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18315 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18316 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18317 \begin_inset space ~
18321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18323 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18330 \begin_layout Standard
18331 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18334 \begin_layout Description
18336 \begin_inset space ~
18339 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18340 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18341 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18345 Graphics Interchange Format
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 (GIF, file extension
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18362 \begin_inset Index idx
18365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18397 Portable Network Graphics
18398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18401 (PNG, file extension
18402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18414 \begin_inset Index idx
18417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18449 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18453 (JPG, file extension
18454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18478 \begin_inset Index idx
18481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_layout Description
18514 \begin_inset space ~
18517 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18519 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18520 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18521 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18522 \begin_inset Newline newline
18525 Scalable image formats can be
18526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18529 Scalable Vector Graphics
18530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18533 (SVG, file extension
18534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18546 \begin_inset Index idx
18549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18581 Encapsulated PostScript
18582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18585 (EPS, file extension
18586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18598 \begin_inset Index idx
18601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18633 Portable Document Format
18634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18637 (PDF, file extension
18638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18650 \begin_inset Index idx
18653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18668 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18669 result will not be scalable.
18670 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18684 \begin_layout Standard
18685 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18692 \begin_layout Subsection
18693 Grouping of Image Settings
18694 \begin_inset Index idx
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 Images ! Settings grouping
18706 \begin_layout Standard
18707 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18709 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18710 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18712 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18713 need to manually change each of them.
18717 \begin_layout Standard
18718 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18737 \begin_inset space ~
18741 \begin_inset space ~
18747 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18748 and checking the name of the desired group.
18751 \begin_layout Section
18753 \begin_inset Index idx
18756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18772 \begin_layout Standard
18773 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18776 arg "tabular-insert"
18781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18785 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18786 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18787 from the rest of the table.
18788 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18789 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18791 Here is an example table:
18794 \begin_layout Standard
18796 \begin_inset Tabular
18797 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18798 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 \begin_layout Subsection
19006 \begin_layout Standard
19007 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19010 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19014 This brings up the table dialog.
19015 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19016 cursor is placed currently.
19017 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19018 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19019 done on all of your selection.
19022 \begin_layout Standard
19023 In addition to the table dialog, the
19026 \begin_inset space ~
19031 helps you in setting table properties.
19032 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19035 \begin_layout Standard
19039 \begin_inset space ~
19044 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19045 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19046 current cell respectively.
19047 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19049 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19050 of text, see section
19051 \begin_inset space ~
19055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19057 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19064 \begin_layout Standard
19065 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19066 using the check box
19075 This will merge the cells to
19079 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19080 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19081 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19082 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19083 in the last row without the upper border:
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19088 \begin_inset Tabular
19089 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19090 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19091 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19092 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19190 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 \begin_layout Standard
19226 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19227 -arguments for the table.
19228 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19229 explained in the chapter
19236 \begin_inset space ~
19242 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19243 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19244 but are visible in the output.
19247 \begin_layout Standard
19248 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19256 Most DVI-viewers are
19260 able to display rotations.
19268 \begin_layout Standard
19273 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19278 adds lines for all cell borders.
19281 \begin_layout Subsection
19283 \begin_inset Index idx
19286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19287 Tables ! Multi-page
19293 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19305 \begin_layout Standard
19306 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19309 \begin_inset space ~
19313 \begin_inset space ~
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19326 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19327 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19330 \begin_layout Description
19335 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19336 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19337 except for the first page, if
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19348 \begin_layout Description
19352 \begin_inset space ~
19357 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19358 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19361 \begin_layout Description
19366 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19367 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19368 except for the last page, if
19371 \begin_inset space ~
19379 \begin_layout Description
19383 \begin_inset space ~
19388 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19389 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19392 \begin_layout Description
19393 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19394 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19400 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19403 \begin_inset space ~
19411 \begin_layout Standard
19412 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19413 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19414 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19420 In this context, first means first in this order:
19423 \begin_inset space ~
19435 \begin_inset space ~
19440 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19443 \begin_layout Standard
19445 \begin_inset Tabular
19446 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19447 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19448 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19449 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19450 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19451 <row endfirsthead="true">
19452 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19463 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 <row endfirsthead="true">
19483 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19515 <row endhead="true">
19516 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <row endhead="true">
19547 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <row endfoot="true">
19580 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21469 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21500 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21531 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <row endlastfoot="true">
21562 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 \begin_layout Subsection
21601 \begin_inset Index idx
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21613 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21620 \begin_layout Standard
21621 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21622 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21623 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21624 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21628 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21631 \begin_layout Standard
21632 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21633 for the column in the table dialog.
21634 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21635 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21639 \begin_layout Standard
21641 \begin_inset Tabular
21642 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21643 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21645 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 This is longer now.
21796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21848 This is longer now.
21853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 \begin_layout Standard
21880 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21881 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21887 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21893 Selection with the mouse or with
21897 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21898 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21899 the selection from outside the table.
21902 \begin_layout Section
21904 \begin_inset Index idx
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21923 \begin_layout Subsection
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21928 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21929 have a fixed location.
21931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21938 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21946 \begin_inset space ~
21951 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21952 too many notes on the current page.
21955 \begin_layout Standard
21956 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21957 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21958 and pages without text.
21959 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21960 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21961 Floats are therefore numbered.
21962 Referencing is described in section
21963 \begin_inset space ~
21967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21969 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21976 \begin_layout Standard
21977 To insert a float, use the menu
21979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21983 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21984 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21986 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21987 \begin_inset Index idx
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21997 paragraph within the float.
21998 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21999 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22000 left-clicking on the box label.
22001 A closed float box looks like this:
22002 \begin_inset Graphics
22003 filename clipart/float.png
22008 – a gray button with a red label.
22011 \begin_layout Standard
22012 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22014 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22017 \begin_layout Subsection
22019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22021 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22026 \begin_inset Index idx
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22030 Floats ! Figure floats
22038 \begin_layout Standard
22040 \begin_inset space ~
22044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22046 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22050 was created using the menu
22052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22053 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22059 arg "float-insert figure"
22063 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22072 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22076 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22077 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22079 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22081 \begin_inset space ~
22089 arg "layout-paragraph"
22095 \begin_layout Standard
22096 \begin_inset Float figure
22101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 \begin_inset Graphics
22104 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22119 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22123 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22136 \begin_layout Standard
22137 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22138 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22149 ) and refer to it using the menu
22151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22157 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22161 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22162 vague references like
22163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22170 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22171 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22181 For more about cross-references, see section
22182 \begin_inset space ~
22186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22188 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22195 \begin_layout Standard
22196 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22197 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22198 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22199 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22200 as described in section
22201 \begin_inset space ~
22205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22207 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22213 \begin_inset space ~
22217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22219 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22223 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22224 You can also set the images one below the other.
22226 \begin_inset space ~
22230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22232 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22239 reference "fig:Platypus"
22243 are the subfigures.
22246 \begin_layout Standard
22247 \begin_inset Float figure
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22253 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22257 \begin_inset Float figure
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22268 name "fig:Undefinable"
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 \begin_inset Graphics
22282 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22293 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22297 \begin_inset Float figure
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22308 name "fig:Platypus"
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 \begin_inset Graphics
22322 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22334 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22346 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22350 Two distorted images.
22363 \begin_layout Subsection
22365 \begin_inset Index idx
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 Floats ! Table floats
22377 \begin_layout Standard
22378 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22381 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22384 or the toolbar button
22387 arg "float-insert table"
22391 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22392 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22393 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22395 \begin_inset space ~
22399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22401 reference "tab:Table-float"
22408 \begin_layout Standard
22409 \begin_inset Float table
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22420 name "tab:Table-float"
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 \begin_inset Tabular
22435 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22436 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22438 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22590 \end{array}\right]$
22598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22611 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22632 \begin_layout Subsection
22634 \begin_inset Index idx
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 \begin_layout Standard
22648 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22649 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22650 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22652 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22660 \begin_inset space ~
22668 \begin_layout Section
22670 \begin_inset Index idx
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22682 \begin_layout Standard
22684 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22686 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22687 \begin_inset space \space{}
22694 \begin_layout Standard
22695 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22696 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22702 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22703 and its alignment within the page.
22706 \begin_layout Standard
22708 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22718 height_special "totalheight"
22723 backgroundcolor "none"
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 This is a minipage.
22730 The text is set in an italic style.
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22737 another formatting.
22745 \begin_layout Standard
22746 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22749 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22753 as described in section
22754 \begin_inset space ~
22758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22760 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22765 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22771 \begin_layout Standard
22772 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22782 height_special "totalheight"
22787 backgroundcolor "none"
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22792 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22798 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22802 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22812 height_special "totalheight"
22817 backgroundcolor "none"
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22822 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22830 \begin_layout Standard
22831 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22837 \begin_layout Standard
22838 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22840 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22847 \begin_inset space ~
22855 \begin_layout Chapter
22856 Mathematical Formulas
22857 \begin_inset Index idx
22860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22867 \begin_inset Index idx
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22901 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22908 \begin_layout Standard
22909 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22914 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22917 \begin_layout Section
22919 \begin_inset Index idx
22922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 \begin_layout Standard
22932 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22945 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22947 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22948 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22949 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22957 \begin_layout Standard
22958 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22962 \begin_inset space ~
22967 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22970 \begin_layout Standard
22971 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22972 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22975 \begin_layout Standard
22976 This is a line with an inline formula
22977 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22983 \begin_layout Standard
22984 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22985 paragraph, like this one:
22986 \begin_inset Formula
22993 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22996 \begin_layout Standard
22998 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23000 For example, typing
23001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23014 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23015 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23019 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23022 \begin_inset space ~
23030 \begin_layout Subsection
23031 Navigating in Formulas
23032 \begin_inset Index idx
23035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 \begin_layout Standard
23045 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23046 achieved with the arrow keys.
23048 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23049 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23054 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23055 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23059 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23063 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23066 \end{array}\right]$
23074 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23079 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23080 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23083 \begin_layout Standard
23088 , printed in this document as
23089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23093 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23100 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23101 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23102 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23107 For example, if you want
23108 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23116 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23126 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23130 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23135 , since in the latter case only the
23138 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23143 will be under the square root sign:
23144 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23150 \begin_layout Standard
23151 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23153 \begin_inset Formula
23155 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23164 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23165 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23168 \begin_layout Subsection
23172 \begin_layout Standard
23173 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23174 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23178 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23179 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23180 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23181 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23182 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23186 \begin_layout Subsection
23187 Exponents and Subscripts
23188 \begin_inset Index idx
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 \begin_inset Index idx
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 \begin_layout Standard
23211 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23214 arg "math-superscript"
23220 arg "math-subscript"
23223 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23225 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23228 , type in a formula
23231 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23241 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23247 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23251 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23257 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23263 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23272 , you have to use an extra
23276 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23277 For example, if you want
23278 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23284 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23290 Subscripts are similar: To get
23291 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23297 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23305 \begin_layout Subsection
23307 \begin_inset Index idx
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 \begin_layout Standard
23320 Create a fraction either with the command
23326 or by using the icon
23329 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23335 \begin_inset space ~
23341 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23342 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23343 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23348 To move back up, press
23353 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23354 \begin_inset Formula
23356 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23359 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23367 \begin_layout Subsection
23369 \begin_inset Index idx
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 \begin_layout Standard
23382 Roots can be created using the
23385 \begin_inset space ~
23393 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23399 arg "math-insert \\root"
23421 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23427 always produces a square root.
23430 \begin_layout Subsection
23431 Operators with Limits
23432 \begin_inset Index idx
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23454 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23461 \begin_layout Standard
23463 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23467 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23470 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23471 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23472 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23473 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23474 The sum operator will automatically place its
23475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23482 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23484 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23488 \begin_inset Formula
23490 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23495 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23499 \begin_layout Standard
23500 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23502 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23503 behind the operator and using the menu
23505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23506 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23508 \begin_inset space ~
23512 \begin_inset space ~
23526 \begin_layout Standard
23527 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23536 \begin_inset Index idx
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 \begin_inset Formula
23548 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23553 which will place the
23554 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23566 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23567 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23573 \begin_layout Standard
23574 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23581 Have a look at section
23582 \begin_inset space ~
23586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23588 reference "subsec:Functions"
23592 for an explanation of function macros.
23595 \begin_layout Subsection
23597 \begin_inset Index idx
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 \begin_layout Standard
23610 Most math symbols can be found in the
23613 \begin_inset space ~
23618 under one of several categories; including
23635 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23639 \begin_layout Standard
23640 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23641 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23642 don't have to use the
23645 \begin_inset space ~
23650 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23652 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23655 \begin_layout Subsection
23657 \begin_inset Index idx
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 \begin_layout Standard
23670 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23676 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23682 \begin_inset space ~
23690 arg "math-insert \\space"
23694 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23695 For example, the sequence
23700 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23703 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23705 \begin_inset Graphics
23706 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23711 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23712 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23713 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23714 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23715 , because they are negative
23717 Here are two examples:
23720 \begin_layout Standard
23730 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23736 \begin_layout Standard
23746 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23752 \begin_layout Subsection
23754 \begin_inset Index idx
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23766 name "subsec:Functions"
23773 \begin_layout Standard
23777 \begin_inset space ~
23782 contains under the button
23785 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23788 a number of function macros, such as
23789 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23793 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23801 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23808 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23809 avoid confusions, because
23810 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23814 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23820 \begin_layout Standard
23821 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23823 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23827 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23833 \begin_layout Standard
23834 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23835 are placed, as described in section
23836 \begin_inset space ~
23840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23842 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23849 \begin_layout Subsection
23851 \begin_inset Index idx
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 \begin_layout Standard
23864 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23866 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23867 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23868 commands, for example, to enter
23869 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23872 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23873 Our example is entered by typing
23878 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23885 \begin_inset space ~
23889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23891 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23895 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23898 \begin_layout Standard
23899 \begin_inset Float table
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23910 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23914 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 \begin_inset Tabular
23925 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23926 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23927 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23928 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24013 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24337 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24391 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24490 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24511 \begin_layout Standard
24512 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24515 \begin_inset space ~
24523 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24526 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24530 \begin_layout Section
24531 Brackets and Delimiters
24532 \begin_inset Index idx
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24542 \begin_inset Index idx
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24554 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24561 \begin_layout Standard
24562 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24564 For some purposes, using just the keys
24569 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24570 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24571 toolbar delimiter icon
24574 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24578 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24579 \begin_inset Formula
24581 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24589 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24590 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24594 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24597 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24603 \begin_inset Formula
24605 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24613 \begin_layout Standard
24614 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24615 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24619 \begin_layout Standard
24620 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24621 left side and right side.
24622 If you use the option
24625 \begin_inset space ~
24630 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24631 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24633 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24638 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24639 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24642 \begin_layout Standard
24643 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24644 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24645 is to go inside the brackets.
24646 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24651 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24652 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24653 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24657 arg "math-delim ( )"
24663 \begin_layout Section
24664 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24665 \begin_inset Index idx
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24675 \begin_inset Index idx
24678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 \begin_inset Index idx
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24689 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24697 \begin_layout Standard
24698 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24702 \begin_inset space ~
24710 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24714 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24715 Here is an example:
24716 \begin_inset Formula
24718 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24727 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24728 \begin_inset space ~
24732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24734 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24739 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24740 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24741 This alignment is set in the box
24746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24795 for every column as default.
24796 For example, the sequence
24797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24808 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24809 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24810 corresponds to the relevant column.
24811 The result will look like this:
24812 \begin_inset Formula
24815 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24816 column & has & has\,right\\
24817 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24826 \begin_layout Standard
24827 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24830 arg "newline-insert newline"
24833 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24834 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24836 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24839 or the math toolbar.
24842 \begin_layout Standard
24843 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24844 It can be created with the menu
24846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24847 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 \begin_inset space ~
24861 Here is an example:
24862 \begin_inset Formula
24876 \begin_layout Standard
24877 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24880 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24883 arg "newline-insert newline"
24887 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24892 arg "newline-insert newline"
24895 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24903 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24904 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24905 A new row is created by every further entry of
24908 arg "newline-insert newline"
24912 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24913 Here is an example:
24914 \begin_inset Formula
24916 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24917 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24922 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24923 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24924 \begin_inset Formula
24926 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24934 \begin_layout Standard
24935 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24942 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24943 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24946 reference "eq:asquared"
24951 The other types are described in section
24952 \begin_inset space ~
24956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24958 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24965 \begin_layout Section
24966 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24967 \begin_inset Index idx
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 Math ! Formula numbering
24977 \begin_inset Index idx
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 Math ! Referencing formulas
24987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24989 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24996 \begin_layout Standard
24997 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25000 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25002 \begin_inset space ~
25006 \begin_inset space ~
25014 arg "math-number-toggle"
25018 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25019 within parentheses.
25020 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25021 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25022 the document class.
25023 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25024 separated by a dot:
25025 \begin_inset Formula
25035 arg "math-number-toggle"
25038 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25039 You can only number displayed formulas.
25042 \begin_layout Standard
25043 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25045 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25046 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25048 \begin_inset space ~
25052 \begin_inset space ~
25060 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25063 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25064 \begin_inset Formula
25067 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25073 To number all lines use the shortcut
25076 arg "math-number-toggle"
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25086 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25087 A label is inserted with the menu
25089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25098 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25099 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25100 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25112 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25113 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25114 We inserted in the following example the label
25115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25122 in the second line:
25123 \begin_inset Formula
25125 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25126 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25131 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25132 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25133 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25137 \begin_inset space ~
25145 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25149 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25150 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25151 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25152 as the formula number:
25155 \begin_layout Standard
25156 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25159 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25166 \begin_layout Standard
25167 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25168 's cross-reference box are described in section
25169 \begin_inset space ~
25173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25175 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25180 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25188 \begin_layout Section
25189 User defined math macros
25190 \begin_inset Index idx
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 \begin_layout Standard
25204 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25205 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25206 Math macros are explained in section
25209 \begin_inset space ~
25221 \begin_layout Section
25225 \begin_layout Subsection
25227 \begin_inset Index idx
25230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 \begin_layout Standard
25240 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25241 To set a font in a formula, use the
25244 \begin_inset space ~
25252 arg "math-insert \\font"
25255 , or enter its command, listed in table
25256 \begin_inset space ~
25260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25262 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25269 \begin_layout Standard
25270 \begin_inset Float table
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25281 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25285 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 \begin_inset Tabular
25296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25297 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25445 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25506 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 \begin_layout Standard
25568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25592 \begin_layout Standard
25593 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25594 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25599 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25600 space when you need a space in the box.
25601 Here is an example where
25602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25613 denotes the set of numbers:
25614 \begin_inset Formula
25616 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25626 You can, for example, put a character in
25635 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25639 \begin_inset Newline newline
25642 So it is better not to use this feature.
25645 \begin_layout Standard
25646 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25647 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25651 \begin_inset Newline newline
25654 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25660 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25661 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25667 \begin_layout Standard
25674 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25678 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25680 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25681 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25683 \begin_inset space ~
25691 \begin_layout Subsection
25693 \begin_inset Index idx
25696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25706 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25708 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25712 \begin_inset space ~
25716 \begin_inset space ~
25724 \begin_inset space ~
25732 arg "math-insert \\font"
25736 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25737 in black instead of blue.
25738 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25739 Here is an example:
25740 \begin_inset Formula
25743 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25744 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25753 \begin_layout Subsection
25755 \begin_inset Index idx
25758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25767 \begin_layout Standard
25768 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25769 automatically chosen in most situations.
25787 For most characters,
25795 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25796 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25801 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25802 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25803 thinks are appropriate.
25804 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25807 arg "math-insert \\style"
25811 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25812 For example, you can set
25813 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25816 , which is normally in
25825 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25829 The four styles are used in the following example:
25832 \begin_layout Standard
25833 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25837 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25841 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25845 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25851 \begin_layout Standard
25852 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25853 is set in a particular size with the menu
25855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25857 \begin_inset space ~
25862 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25863 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25864 will be adjusted to correspond.
25865 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25876 \begin_layout Standard
25880 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25886 \begin_layout Section
25887 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25889 \begin_inset Index idx
25892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25899 \begin_inset Index idx
25902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25911 \begin_layout Standard
25913 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25914 that are in common use.
25917 \begin_layout Subsection
25918 Enabling AMS-Support
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25922 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25923 the document by selecting the checkbox
25926 \begin_inset space ~
25930 \begin_inset space ~
25934 \begin_inset space ~
25941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25945 \begin_inset Index idx
25948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25949 Document ! Settings
25957 \begin_inset space ~
25963 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25964 -errors in formulas,
25965 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25968 \begin_layout Subsection
25970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25972 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25977 \begin_inset Index idx
25980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25981 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25989 \begin_layout Standard
25990 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25991 provides a selection of different formula types.
25993 allows you to choose between
26014 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26021 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26024 \begin_layout Chapter
26028 \begin_layout Section
26030 \begin_inset Index idx
26033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26042 name "sec:Cross-References"
26049 \begin_layout Standard
26050 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26051 's strengths is cross-references.
26052 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26054 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26055 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26056 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26059 \begin_layout Enumerate
26063 \begin_layout Enumerate
26064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26066 name "enu:Second-item"
26073 \begin_layout Enumerate
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26078 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26080 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26083 or by pressing the toolbar button
26090 A gray label box like this:
26091 \begin_inset Graphics
26092 filename clipart/label.png
26096 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26098 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26133 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26134 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26150 \begin_layout Standard
26151 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26156 or the toolbar button
26159 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26163 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26164 \begin_inset Graphics
26165 filename clipart/reference.png
26169 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26171 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26184 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26188 \begin_layout Standard
26189 As an alternative to
26191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26194 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26199 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26200 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26202 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26214 \begin_layout Standard
26215 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26216 \begin_inset space ~
26220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26222 reference "enu:Second-item"
26229 \begin_layout Standard
26230 It is recommended to use a protected space
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 described in section
26236 \begin_inset space ~
26240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26242 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26251 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26252 line breaks between them.
26255 \begin_layout Standard
26256 There are six formats of cross-references:
26259 \begin_layout Description
26260 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26263 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26270 \begin_layout Description
26271 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26272 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26284 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26291 \begin_layout Description
26292 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26293 \begin_inset space ~
26297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26298 LatexCommand pageref
26299 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26306 \begin_layout Description
26308 \begin_inset space ~
26312 \begin_inset space ~
26315 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26317 LatexCommand vpageref
26318 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26323 \begin_inset Newline newline
26326 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26327 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26328 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26329 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26330 it prints “on the next page”.
26331 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26334 \begin_layout Description
26336 \begin_inset space ~
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26347 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26350 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26355 \begin_inset Newline newline
26358 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26364 ; otherwise it behaves like
26368 \begin_inset space ~
26372 \begin_inset space ~
26381 \begin_layout Description
26383 \begin_inset space ~
26386 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26387 \begin_inset Newline newline
26391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26409 \begin_inset Index idx
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 -packages ! prettyref
26420 \begin_inset Index idx
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26425 -packages ! refstyle
26436 \begin_inset Newline newline
26439 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26440 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26443 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26448 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26456 is the default and preferred because
26460 supports only English documents.
26461 The format is specified by using the command
26473 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26474 preamble of the document.
26475 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26488 ) can be done with this command
26489 \begin_inset Newline newline
26496 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26501 \begin_inset Newline newline
26504 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26508 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26515 \begin_layout Description
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26520 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26522 LatexCommand nameref
26523 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26530 \begin_layout Standard
26531 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26532 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26534 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26538 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26542 \begin_layout Standard
26543 You can only use the style
26547 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26551 is always possible.
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26556 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26558 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26559 \begin_inset space ~
26563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26565 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26572 \begin_layout Standard
26573 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26581 \begin_inset space ~
26586 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26587 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26590 \begin_inset space ~
26595 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26596 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26599 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26605 \begin_layout Standard
26606 You can change labels at any time.
26607 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26608 do not need to think about this.
26611 \begin_layout Standard
26612 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26614 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26618 \begin_layout Standard
26619 References are described in detail in the section
26620 \begin_inset space ~
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26638 \begin_layout Section
26639 Table of Contents and other Listings
26640 \begin_inset Index idx
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 \begin_inset Index idx
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26654 Navigating ! Outline
26660 \begin_inset Index idx
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26679 \begin_layout Subsection
26681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26683 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26694 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26696 \begin_inset space ~
26700 \begin_inset space ~
26706 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26708 If you click on it, the
26712 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26713 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26714 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26716 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26718 \begin_inset space ~
26723 that is described in section
26724 \begin_inset space ~
26728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26730 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26739 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26741 \begin_inset space ~
26745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26747 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26751 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26753 \begin_inset space ~
26757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26759 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26763 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26765 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26768 \begin_layout Subsection
26769 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26772 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26779 \begin_layout Standard
26780 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26782 You can insert them via the
26784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26788 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26791 \begin_layout Section
26792 URLs and Hyperlinks
26793 \begin_inset Index idx
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset Index idx
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26815 \begin_layout Subsection
26817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26836 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26838 \begin_inset Flex URL
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26858 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26862 \begin_layout Standard
26863 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26880 \begin_layout Subsection
26882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26884 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26897 or with the toolbar button
26904 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26913 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26914 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26917 name "LyX's homepage"
26918 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26922 , an Email address like this:
26923 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26925 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26926 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26931 , or a link to a file.
26934 \begin_layout Standard
26935 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26948 to the link target.
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26953 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26954 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26955 the text style dialog.
26956 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26962 name "LyX's homepage"
26963 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26970 \begin_layout Standard
26971 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26975 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26978 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26982 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26984 \begin_inset Newline newline
26992 \begin_inset Newline newline
26999 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27002 \begin_layout Section
27004 \begin_inset Index idx
27007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27016 name "sec:Appendices"
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 Appendices are created with the menu
27026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27028 \begin_inset space ~
27032 \begin_inset space ~
27038 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27039 as the appendix part of the book.
27040 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27045 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27046 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27047 and the subsection number.
27048 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27054 \begin_inset space ~
27058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27060 reference "chap:Credits"
27065 \begin_inset space ~
27069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27071 reference "subsec:Export"
27078 \begin_layout Section
27080 \begin_inset Index idx
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27092 name "sec:Bibliography"
27099 \begin_layout Standard
27100 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27102 You can include a bibliography database,
27106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 Known under the name
27108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27111 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27121 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27122 manually, using the paragraph environment
27126 , which was described in section
27127 \begin_inset space ~
27131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27133 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27138 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27139 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27143 use a bibliography database.
27146 \begin_layout Subsection
27147 The Bibliography Environment
27150 \begin_layout Standard
27155 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27157 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27166 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27168 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27178 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27181 \begin_layout Standard
27182 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27187 or the toolbar button
27190 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27194 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27195 containing the available citations.
27196 Select one or more keys from the list and
27206 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27207 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27211 \begin_layout Standard
27212 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27213 entry with surrounding brackets.
27218 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27219 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27231 \begin_layout Standard
27235 Companion Second Edition
27238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27240 key "latexcompanion"
27247 \begin_layout Standard
27248 The \SpecialChar LyX
27249 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27263 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27265 \begin_inset space ~
27273 arg "layout-paragraph"
27277 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27280 \begin_layout Subsection
27281 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27283 \begin_inset Index idx
27286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27287 Bibliography ! Databases
27293 \begin_inset Index idx
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27306 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27314 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27322 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27323 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27328 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27330 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27331 your working field in a database.
27332 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27333 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27334 list for that document.
27335 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 The database is a text file with the file extension
27341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27352 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27353 The format is explained in
27354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27360 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27364 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27369 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27370 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27371 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27373 \begin_inset Flex URL
27376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27378 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27386 \begin_layout Standard
27387 To use a database, use the menu
27389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27394 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27402 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27403 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27410 Add bibliography to TOC
27412 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27417 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27418 in the document or just the cited references.
27421 \begin_layout Standard
27422 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27434 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27435 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27436 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27437 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27439 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27445 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27446 \begin_inset Newline newline
27450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27452 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27464 \begin_layout Standard
27465 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27468 \begin_layout Standard
27469 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27470 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27472 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27480 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27486 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 The following variants are possible:
27494 \begin_layout Description
27495 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27496 with other bibliography packages (e.
27497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27501 \begin_inset space \space{}
27508 ), only with the package
27512 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27516 \begin_layout Description
27517 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27518 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27519 with all bibliography packages, except
27524 \begin_layout Description
27525 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27530 , works with all bibliography packages
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27534 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27535 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27537 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27540 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27544 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27553 \begin_layout Standard
27554 When you select the option
27556 Sectioned bibliography
27560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27564 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27565 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27567 Customizing Bibliographies
27571 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27576 Additional Features
27581 \begin_layout Standard
27582 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27583 the two methods of creating them.
27584 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27585 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27586 We used the style file
27590 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27593 \begin_layout Subsection
27595 \begin_inset Index idx
27598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27599 Bibliography ! Citation format
27607 \begin_layout Standard
27608 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27609 For this feature you need to enable the option
27615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27619 \begin_inset Index idx
27622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27623 Document ! Settings
27633 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27634 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27635 style files as explained in
27636 the previous section.
27639 \begin_layout Standard
27640 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27641 the citation reference window.
27642 Here is an example where the text
27643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27647 \begin_inset space ~
27651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27654 appears after the reference:
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27659 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27662 key "latexcompanion"
27669 \begin_layout Section
27671 \begin_inset Index idx
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27691 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27695 \begin_inset space ~
27700 or the toolbar button
27707 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27708 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27709 by \SpecialChar LyX
27710 as the index entry.
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27717 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 \begin_inset space ~
27725 A light blue box labeled
27726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27737 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27738 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27742 \begin_layout Standard
27743 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27744 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27745 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27746 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27750 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27757 \begin_layout Subsection
27758 Grouping Index Entries
27759 \begin_inset Index idx
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27772 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27774 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27775 lists under the entry
27776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27784 First we create the entry
27785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27793 \begin_inset space ~
27797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27799 reference "subsec:Lists"
27804 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27805 \begin_inset space ~
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27811 reference "sec:Itemize"
27815 , we insert the command
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27834 \begin_layout Standard
27835 for the enumerated list in section
27836 \begin_inset space ~
27840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27842 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27849 \begin_layout Standard
27850 The exclamation mark
27851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27858 marks the grouping levels.
27859 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27860 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27861 If we don't have an index entry for
27862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27869 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27872 \begin_layout Subsection
27874 \begin_inset Index idx
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27878 Index ! Page ranges
27886 \begin_layout Standard
27887 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27889 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27890 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27891 an index entry in section
27892 \begin_inset space ~
27896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27898 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27905 \begin_layout Standard
27908 Paragraph environments|(
27911 \begin_layout Standard
27912 and another entry at the end of section
27913 \begin_inset space ~
27917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27919 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27929 Paragraph environments|)
27932 \begin_layout Standard
27934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27957 respectively start and end the index range.
27958 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27959 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27960 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27961 An example is the index entry
27962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27965 Document ! Settings
27966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27972 \begin_layout Subsection
27974 \begin_inset Index idx
27977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27978 Index ! Cross referencing
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27988 We referred for example in the index entry
27989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27997 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28007 ) to the index entry
28008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28015 in the same section using the entry
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28021 GIF|see{Image formats}
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28027 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28028 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28031 \begin_layout Subsection
28033 \begin_inset Index idx
28036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28037 Index ! Entry order
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28046 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28047 follow the rules for the index order.
28048 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28054 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28056 \begin_inset space ~
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28062 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28071 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28072 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28097 \begin_inset Index idx
28100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 Dummy entries ! maïs
28107 \begin_inset Index idx
28110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28111 Dummy entries ! maître
28117 \begin_inset Index idx
28120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28126 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28127 maïs, maison, maître.
28128 To achieve this, we use the command
28131 \begin_layout Standard
28134 previous entry@current entry
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28138 In our case we want to have
28139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28154 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28157 \begin_layout Standard
28163 \begin_layout Standard
28164 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28165 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28167 See the next subsection for an example.
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28171 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28183 to generate the index (see section
28184 \begin_inset space ~
28188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28190 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28199 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28200 -package aeguill in section
28201 \begin_inset space ~
28205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28207 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28211 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28212 -packages although all these index
28213 commands start with
28214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28227 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28232 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28235 \begin_layout Standard
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28259 \begin_layout Subsection
28261 \begin_inset Index idx
28264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28265 Index ! Entry layout
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28274 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28275 \begin_inset Index idx
28278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28281 This is an italic dummy entry
28286 You can also format the page number using the character
28287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28294 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28295 -command without a backslash.
28296 We can write for example
28299 \begin_layout Standard
28302 italic page number:|textit
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 to get the page number in italic.
28307 \begin_inset Index idx
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28316 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28317 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28335 \begin_inset space ~
28341 Have a look at section
28342 \begin_inset space ~
28346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28348 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28352 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28369 to generate the index, see section
28370 \begin_inset space ~
28374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28376 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28385 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28390 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28394 key "latexcompanion"
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28407 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28409 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28410 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28411 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28412 If so, put the following in the preamble
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28438 in the index entry.
28439 \begin_inset Index idx
28442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28448 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28449 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28450 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28454 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28455 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28456 a bold font for all index entries.
28457 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28469 documentation for details,
28470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28472 key "makeindex,xindy"
28479 \begin_layout Subsection
28481 \begin_inset Index idx
28484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28493 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 If the index generation program
28505 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28506 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28510 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28511 distribution, is used.
28515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28520 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28521 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28522 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28523 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28524 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28534 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28536 dialog, see section
28537 \begin_inset space ~
28541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28543 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28548 The available options are listed and explained in
28549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28551 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28556 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28560 \begin_layout Standard
28561 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28562 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28570 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28571 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28574 \begin_layout Subsection
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28579 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28580 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28588 next to the standard index.
28590 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28591 that add this feature.
28598 \begin_inset Index idx
28601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28603 -packages ! splitidx
28608 package to generate multiple indexes.
28609 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28624 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28625 style, but it also includes
28626 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28627 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28635 \begin_layout Standard
28636 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28637 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28640 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28643 and select the option
28645 Use multiple Indexes
28652 already contains the standard index
28653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28661 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28662 also appear as a heading) to the
28666 input field and press the
28671 The new index now also appears in the list.
28672 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28673 label color to the new index.
28676 \begin_layout Standard
28677 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28687 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28688 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28689 are additional features:
28692 \begin_layout Itemize
28693 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28694 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28697 \begin_layout Itemize
28698 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28699 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28707 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28708 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28709 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28710 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28713 \begin_layout Section
28714 Nomenclature/Glossary
28715 \begin_inset Index idx
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28725 \begin_inset Index idx
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28759 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28766 \begin_layout Standard
28767 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28768 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28769 called nomenclature or glossary.
28772 \begin_layout Standard
28773 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28780 \begin_inset Index idx
28783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 -packages ! nomencl
28791 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28799 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28803 \begin_layout Standard
28804 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28805 and then use the menu
28807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28813 \begin_inset space ~
28818 or the toolbar button
28821 arg "nomencl-insert"
28826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28837 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28840 \begin_layout Standard
28841 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28842 The first is the term or
28846 that you wish to define.
28851 of the term or symbol.
28854 \begin_layout Standard
28855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28863 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28864 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28872 \begin_layout Subsection
28873 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28874 \begin_inset Index idx
28877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28878 Nomenclature ! Layout
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28887 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28891 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28898 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 \begin_inset Newline newline
28914 \begin_inset Newline newline
28920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28927 character starts/ends the formula.
28928 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28929 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28941 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28951 \begin_layout Standard
28952 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28953 -syntax is given in section
28954 \begin_inset space ~
28958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28960 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28967 \begin_layout Standard
28971 \begin_inset space ~
28976 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28978 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28983 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28990 in this document is:
28991 \begin_inset Newline newline
28996 dummy entry for the character
29001 \begin_inset Newline newline
29013 \begin_inset space ~
29023 font use the command
29052 \begin_layout Standard
29053 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29058 \begin_inset space \space{}
29062 \begin_inset Newline newline
29078 \begin_inset Newline newline
29081 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29082 This command will make the font of all symbols
29089 \begin_inset space ~
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29098 If the characters |
29099 \begin_inset space \space{}
29103 \begin_inset space \space{}
29107 \begin_inset space \space{}
29111 \begin_inset space \space{}
29115 \begin_inset space \space{}
29118 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29119 a quote character in front of them.
29120 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29121 LatexCommand nomenclature
29122 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29123 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29130 \begin_layout Subsection
29131 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29132 \begin_inset Index idx
29135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29144 \begin_layout Standard
29145 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29146 -code of the symbol
29148 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29150 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29153 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29154 LatexCommand nomenclature
29156 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29163 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29167 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29168 LatexCommand nomenclature
29171 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29176 They will be sorted by
29177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29203 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29206 will be sorted before the
29210 since the character
29211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29218 is considered in sorting.
29221 \begin_layout Standard
29222 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29225 \begin_inset space ~
29230 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29231 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29233 For the example given, you can insert
29237 in this field for the
29238 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29245 will be located before
29246 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29252 \begin_layout Standard
29253 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29267 \begin_layout Subsection
29268 Nomenclature Options
29269 \begin_inset Index idx
29272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29273 Nomenclature ! Options
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29286 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29287 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29290 \begin_layout Description
29291 refeq Appends the phrase
29292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29307 to every nomenclature entry, where
29313 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29316 \begin_layout Description
29317 refpage Appends the phrase
29318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29333 to every nomenclature entry, where
29339 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29342 \begin_layout Description
29343 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29346 \begin_layout Standard
29347 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29348 class options list in the
29350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29354 In this document the options
29361 \begin_layout Standard
29362 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29368 \begin_layout Standard
29369 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29370 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29375 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29378 \begin_layout Description
29388 \begin_layout Description
29391 nomrefpage Like the
29398 \begin_layout Description
29401 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29410 \begin_layout Description
29414 \begin_inset space ~
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29425 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29437 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29438 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29442 \begin_layout Standard
29450 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29453 \begin_inset Newline newline
29460 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29465 \begin_inset Newline newline
29469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29484 by their translation.
29487 \begin_layout Subsection
29488 Printing the Nomenclature
29489 \begin_inset Index idx
29492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29493 Nomenclature ! Printing
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29502 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29505 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29521 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29522 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29523 You can choose between these settings:
29526 \begin_layout Description
29527 Default a space of 1
29528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29534 \begin_layout Description
29536 \begin_inset space ~
29540 \begin_inset space ~
29543 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29546 \begin_layout Description
29547 Custom custom space
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29551 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29568 For example, in order to change the name to
29572 , add the following line to the preamble:
29575 \begin_layout Standard
29583 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29586 \begin_layout Subsection
29587 Nomenclature Program
29588 \begin_inset Index idx
29591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29592 Nomenclature ! Program
29598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29600 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29607 \begin_layout Standard
29613 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29614 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29616 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29621 by adding options, see section
29622 \begin_inset space ~
29626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29628 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29633 The available options are listed and explained in
29634 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29636 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29643 \begin_layout Section
29645 \begin_inset Index idx
29648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29659 Document ! Branches
29665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29667 name "sec:Branches"
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29676 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29677 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29678 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29682 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29683 allows you to put text into branches.
29684 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29685 To create a branch, either select the menu
29687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29688 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29691 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29700 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29701 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29702 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29703 and whether the name of the branch should
29704 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29705 (see below for an example).
29706 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29707 to the name of the other) and to add
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29720 \begin_inset space ~
29723 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29724 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29729 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29734 where you can choose a branch.
29735 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29741 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset Branch Question
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29750 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29758 \begin_layout Standard
29759 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29772 \begin_layout Standard
29779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29783 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29784 Consider for example a file
29785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29792 which has the above branches.
29794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29801 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 branch were inactive,
29826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29841 branch was active, likewise
29842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29857 branch was active, and
29858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29865 if both branches were active.
29866 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29867 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
29871 \begin_layout Standard
29873 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29874 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
29875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29882 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
29888 \begin_inset Branch Question
29892 \begin_layout Standard
29894 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
29895 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
29903 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
29904 To control whether a particular inset is
29905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29912 , right-click on the inset button and choose
29913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29921 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29934 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29935 definitions for each branch.
29936 For example you can define for the question branch
29940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29941 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29942 -syntax, see section
29943 \begin_inset space ~
29947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29949 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29961 \begin_layout Standard
29971 \begin_layout Standard
29981 \begin_layout Standard
29982 and for the answer branch
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29995 \begin_layout Standard
30005 \begin_layout Standard
30006 \begin_inset Branch Question
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30042 \begin_layout Standard
30043 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30047 \begin_layout Standard
30051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30079 \begin_layout Standard
30080 Now it is possible to use the
30084 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30091 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30094 commands to obtain conditional output.
30095 Here is an example formula where only the
30102 \begin_inset Formula
30104 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30112 \begin_layout Standard
30113 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30122 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30128 \begin_inset space \space{}
30131 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30133 For this advanced usage, see the
30139 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30144 \begin_layout Section
30146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30148 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30153 \begin_inset Index idx
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30172 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30174 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30180 \begin_inset Index idx
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30185 -packages ! hyperref
30190 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30191 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30192 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30193 part of the document.
30197 \begin_layout Standard
30198 The header information in the dialog tab
30202 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30203 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30204 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30205 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30209 \begin_inset space ~
30213 \begin_inset space ~
30218 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30219 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30220 and author entries.
30224 \begin_inset space ~
30228 \begin_inset space ~
30232 \begin_inset space ~
30237 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30240 \begin_layout Standard
30241 You can specify in the dialog tab
30245 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30250 \begin_inset space ~
30254 \begin_inset space ~
30258 \begin_inset space ~
30263 option allows long links to be split;
30266 \begin_inset space ~
30270 \begin_inset space ~
30274 \begin_inset space ~
30282 \begin_inset space ~
30287 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30290 \begin_inset space ~
30295 colors the different links.
30296 The default colors are:
30299 \begin_layout Labeling
30300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30305 for hyperlinks and URLs
30308 \begin_layout Labeling
30309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30317 \begin_layout Labeling
30318 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30327 but you can change these in the field
30332 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30338 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30346 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30347 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30348 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30356 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30357 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30358 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30368 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30369 when opening the PDF.
30371 \begin_inset space ~
30374 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30375 \begin_inset space ~
30378 1 will only display the sections.
30381 \begin_layout Standard
30382 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30383 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30389 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30399 \begin_layout Section
30401 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30405 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30412 \begin_layout Subsection
30415 \begin_inset Index idx
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30428 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30436 As \SpecialChar LyX
30437 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30438 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30439 commands and constructs,
30442 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30443 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30444 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30445 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30446 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30447 cannot support all packages and
30451 \begin_layout Standard
30452 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30453 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30454 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30458 Code box is created by the menu
30460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30462 \begin_inset space ~
30467 or by the toolbar button
30480 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30491 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30493 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30494 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30501 , you can write the command part
30507 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30508 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30512 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30513 Code box behind the word.
30514 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30515 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30519 \begin_layout Standard
30520 \begin_inset Graphics
30521 filename clipart/ERT.png
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30534 This is a line with a
30538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30570 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30571 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30572 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30573 know that the command is finished.
30581 \begin_layout Subsection
30582 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30584 \begin_inset Argument 1
30587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30588 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30595 \begin_inset Index idx
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30608 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30616 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30617 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30618 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30619 uses in the background.
30620 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30621 is based on commands, you can
30622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30630 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30631 any time if you know the right commands.
30632 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30633 is the end of the day.
30634 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30635 all caption labels bold.
30636 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30638 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30642 \begin_layout Standard
30643 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30645 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30647 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30650 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30660 As result you find that the package
30665 \begin_inset Index idx
30668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30670 -packages ! caption
30676 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30681 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30685 \begin_inset space ~
30693 \begin_layout Standard
30698 usepackage[options]{package name}
30701 \begin_layout Standard
30702 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30703 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30704 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30705 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 In your case the package name is
30714 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30719 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30720 So you add the command
30723 \begin_layout Standard
30728 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30731 \begin_layout Standard
30732 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30737 For more commands provided by the
30741 package, have a look at its documentation,
30742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30756 \begin_layout Standard
30757 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30759 For example if you use a
30763 class, you don't need the package
30767 , you can instead write
30770 \begin_layout Standard
30775 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30780 \begin_layout Standard
30781 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30782 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30783 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30790 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30793 \begin_layout Standard
30794 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30795 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30797 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30798 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30799 Code box as described in the previous
30803 \begin_layout Standard
30804 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30805 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30810 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30817 \begin_layout Standard
30818 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30824 \begin_layout Standard
30828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30838 \begin_inset Note Note
30841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30850 \begin_layout Left Header
30851 \begin_inset Argument 1
30854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 \begin_inset Note Note
30877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 defines the header line as described below
30886 \begin_layout Center Header
30887 \begin_inset Argument 1
30890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 \begin_layout Right Header
30900 \begin_inset Argument 1
30903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30924 \begin_layout Left Footer
30925 \begin_inset Argument 1
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30949 \begin_layout Center Footer
30950 \begin_inset Argument 1
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30965 \begin_inset Newline newline
30969 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30975 \begin_layout Right Footer
30976 \begin_inset Argument 1
30979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 \begin_layout Section
31002 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31005 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31010 \begin_inset Index idx
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31014 Document ! Header/Footer line
31020 \begin_inset Index idx
31023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 \begin_layout Standard
31033 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31037 \begin_inset space ~
31048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31054 \begin_inset space ~
31060 As a second step add in the menu
31062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31063 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31072 Custom Header/Footerlines
31075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31079 This module offers the following 6
31080 \begin_inset space ~
31086 \begin_layout Description
31088 \begin_inset space ~
31092 \begin_inset space ~
31096 \begin_inset space ~
31100 \begin_inset space ~
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31110 \begin_layout Description
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31116 \begin_inset space ~
31120 \begin_inset space ~
31124 \begin_inset space ~
31128 \begin_inset space ~
31134 \begin_layout Standard
31135 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31136 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31141 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31143 \begin_inset space ~
31147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31149 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31153 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31156 \begin_layout Standard
31157 \begin_inset Float figure
31163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 \begin_inset Tabular
31167 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31168 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31169 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31171 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31220 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31235 The normal text on the page goes here.
31236 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31238 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31239 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31244 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31264 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31282 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31311 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31329 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31334 name "fig:Page-layout"
31338 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31360 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31364 \begin_inset space ~
31369 is set to “Default”.
31370 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31379 \begin_layout Subsection
31383 \begin_layout Standard
31384 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31385 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31386 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31387 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31389 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31391 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31394 \begin_layout Standard
31395 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31396 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31402 \begin_inset space ~
31410 \begin_layout Description
31413 thepage prints the current page number
31416 \begin_layout Description
31419 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31422 \begin_layout Description
31425 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31428 \begin_layout Description
31431 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31432 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31439 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31442 because it usually goes in a left header.
31445 \begin_layout Description
31448 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31449 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31451 It is normally used in the right header.
31454 \begin_layout Subsection
31455 Default header/footer
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31460 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31461 footer has the page number.
31462 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31463 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31464 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31467 \begin_inset space ~
31475 \begin_layout Subsection
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31481 Some pages are different.
31482 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31483 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31484 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31485 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31486 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31489 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31490 Header and footer decoration line
31493 \begin_layout Standard
31494 By default, you get a 0.4
31495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31498 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31499 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31511 in the following way:
31514 \begin_layout Standard
31521 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31524 \begin_layout Standard
31525 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31538 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31545 \begin_layout Standard
31546 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31548 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31563 Several header/footer lines
31566 \begin_layout Standard
31567 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31568 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31569 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31571 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31587 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31589 \begin_inset space ~
31597 \begin_layout Standard
31604 headheight}{height}
31607 \begin_layout Standard
31612 is a size in standard units (e.
31613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31617 \begin_inset space \space{}
31625 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31626 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31627 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31628 logfile with the menu
31630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31632 \begin_inset space ~
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31645 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31650 \begin_inset Index idx
31653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 -packages ! fancyhdr
31661 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31662 for your header/footer.
31665 \begin_layout Subsection
31669 \begin_layout Standard
31670 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31671 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31672 This example consists of the following definition:
31675 \begin_layout Description
31677 \begin_inset space ~
31686 , empty optional argument
31689 \begin_layout Description
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31694 Header empty, empty optional argument
31697 \begin_layout Description
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31708 in the optional argument
31711 \begin_layout Description
31713 \begin_inset space ~
31722 in the optional argument
31725 \begin_layout Description
31727 \begin_inset space ~
31740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31744 \begin_inset Newline newline
31748 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31755 in the optional argument
31758 \begin_layout Description
31760 \begin_inset space ~
31769 , empty optional argument
31772 \begin_layout Description
31775 headrulewidth set to 2
31776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31784 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31814 pagestyle{headings}
31820 \begin_inset Note Note
31823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31824 switches back to page style with the default headings
31832 \begin_layout Section
31833 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31836 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31841 \begin_inset Index idx
31844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31851 \begin_inset Index idx
31854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31863 \begin_layout Standard
31865 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31866 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31867 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31870 \begin_layout Subsection
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31875 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31881 \begin_inset Index idx
31884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31886 -packages ! preview-latex
31891 (on some systems named simply
31896 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31904 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31906 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31914 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31915 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31916 -package are automatically
31917 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31921 \begin_layout Subsection
31925 \begin_layout Standard
31926 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31927 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31929 activate the option
31932 \begin_inset space ~
31939 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31952 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31959 \begin_inset space ~
31972 \begin_inset space ~
31977 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31980 \begin_layout Standard
31981 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31986 \begin_inset space ~
31994 \begin_inset space ~
32002 \begin_layout Standard
32003 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32004 and when you finish
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32017 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32018 generated by activating the option
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32027 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32035 \begin_layout Subsection
32036 Selected document parts
32039 \begin_layout Standard
32040 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32041 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32042 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32043 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32045 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32051 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32052 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32053 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32056 \begin_layout Standard
32057 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32064 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32076 is explained in section
32078 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32083 \begin_inset space ~
32093 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32094 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32095 the final rotated boxes,
32096 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32097 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32099 Here is the result:
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32103 \begin_inset Preview
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32114 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32120 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32130 height_special "totalheight"
32135 backgroundcolor "none"
32138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32163 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32169 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32191 \begin_layout Standard
32192 Previewing works also for colors.
32193 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32212 is explained in section
32219 \begin_inset space ~
32232 \begin_layout Standard
32233 \begin_inset Preview
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32263 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32290 If \SpecialChar LyX
32291 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32292 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32293 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32294 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32295 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32296 the \SpecialChar TeX
32298 If \SpecialChar LyX
32299 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32300 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32302 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32303 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32304 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32307 \begin_layout Subsection
32312 \begin_layout Standard
32313 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32314 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32317 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32319 \begin_inset space ~
32324 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32326 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32328 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32329 's main window, then only this selection
32330 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32331 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32332 the source view window.
32337 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32338 ; but note that if you have
32339 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32341 not just the one which is open at the time.
32344 \begin_layout Section
32345 Advanced Find and Replace
32346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32348 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32353 \begin_inset Index idx
32356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32363 \begin_inset Index idx
32366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32375 \begin_layout Subsection
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32380 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32381 allows for searching of complex,
32382 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32384 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32385 The key-features are:
32388 \begin_layout Itemize
32389 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32390 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32391 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32395 \begin_layout Itemize
32396 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32397 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32398 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32399 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32402 \begin_layout Itemize
32403 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32404 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32405 outside of mathematics environments
32408 \begin_layout Itemize
32409 Search may be widened to a specific
32414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32418 \begin_inset space ~
32421 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32422 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32429 \begin_layout Itemize
32430 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32431 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32436 \begin_inset space ~
32439 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32442 \begin_layout Subsection
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32447 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32449 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32462 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32465 ) or the toolbar button
32468 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32474 Advanced Find and Replace
32479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32483 \begin_layout Standard
32489 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32493 \begin_inset space ~
32498 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32501 arg "paragraph-break"
32505 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32506 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32510 arg "paragraph-break"
32513 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32517 searches backwards.
32520 \begin_layout Standard
32524 \begin_inset space ~
32529 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32538 \begin_inset space ~
32543 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32547 Searching for mathematics
32550 \begin_layout Standard
32551 Mathematical formulas, such as
32552 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32555 or something more complex like
32556 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32559 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32564 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32565 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32566 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32567 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32577 \begin_layout Standard
32578 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32579 This is done by switching to the
32583 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32588 This way, entering in the
32595 \begin_layout Itemize
32596 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32597 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32600 \begin_layout Itemize
32601 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32602 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32605 \begin_layout Itemize
32606 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32607 of it only within section headings.
32608 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32609 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32613 \begin_layout Itemize
32614 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32615 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32623 The entries made in the
32627 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32636 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32640 button or alternatively press
32643 arg "paragraph-break"
32650 while the cursor is in the
32653 \begin_inset space ~
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32662 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32664 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32668 \begin_layout Itemize
32669 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32670 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32678 with its typewriter version
32679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32693 \begin_layout Itemize
32694 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32700 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32712 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32719 (you may want to enable the
32722 \begin_inset space ~
32730 \begin_inset space ~
32735 options and disable the
32743 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32751 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32752 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32756 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32759 , or occurrences of
32760 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32764 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32770 \begin_layout Subsection
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32780 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32784 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32793 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32799 This is done with the context menu
32801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32802 Insert Regular Expression
32804 while the cursor is in the
32809 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32810 expression matching rules
32814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32815 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32822 \begin_inset space ~
32825 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32826 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32832 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32833 same text in the document.
32834 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32835 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32838 \begin_layout Enumerate
32839 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32844 editor the fraction
32845 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32849 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32852 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32853 fractions with the given denominator.
32856 \begin_layout Enumerate
32857 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32869 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32874 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32875 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32876 Also, by inserting a
32877 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32880 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32881 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32885 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32886 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32887 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32890 , and referring back to them through
32891 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32895 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32899 For example, try searching with the regexp
32900 \begin_inset Newline newline
32903 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32906 \begin_inset Newline newline
32909 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32916 \begin_layout Standard
32917 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32925 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32926 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32927 sub-expressions is absolute.
32929 \begin_inset space ~
32933 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32936 always refers to the first occurrence of
32937 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32940 in all entered regexps.
32948 \begin_layout Section
32950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32952 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32957 \begin_inset Index idx
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 \begin_layout Standard
32971 has a built-in spell checker.
32974 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32981 key or the toolbar button
32984 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32987 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32988 beginning of the currently selected text.
32989 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32990 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32991 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32992 scrolled so that it is visible.
32993 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32994 n, if any could be found.
32995 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32999 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33000 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33003 \begin_layout Standard
33004 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33011 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33012 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33014 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33015 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33018 \begin_inset space ~
33026 arg "dialog-show character"
33029 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33031 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33036 can be downloaded from here:
33037 \begin_inset Newline newline
33041 \begin_inset Flex URL
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33052 \begin_inset Newline newline
33056 \begin_inset space ~
33059 files for each language.
33060 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33061 \begin_inset space ~
33064 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33065 's installation subfolder
33073 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33075 \begin_inset Newline newline
33078 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33079 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33080 but in most cases these are
33096 is the language code.
33099 \begin_layout Subsection
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33106 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33107 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33109 \begin_inset space ~
33112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33115 you can set the following things:
33118 \begin_layout Description
33120 \begin_inset space ~
33123 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33124 should use for spell checking.
33125 Depending on your platform,
33139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33140 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33141 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33156 \begin_inset space ~
33159 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33162 \begin_layout Description
33164 \begin_inset space ~
33167 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33168 will always use the given language
33169 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33172 \begin_layout Description
33174 \begin_inset space ~
33177 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33183 \begin_inset space \space{}
33187 This should normally not be needed.
33190 \begin_layout Description
33192 \begin_inset space ~
33196 \begin_inset space ~
33199 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33211 \begin_layout Description
33213 \begin_inset space ~
33216 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33217 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33218 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33219 appear in a context menu.
33220 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33224 \begin_layout Description
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33234 \begin_inset space ~
33237 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33241 \begin_layout Section
33243 \begin_inset Index idx
33246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33255 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33262 \begin_layout Standard
33264 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33265 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33277 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33286 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33288 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33289 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33290 which are available for many languages.
33293 \begin_layout Standard
33294 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33295 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33299 \begin_layout Subsection
33300 Setting up the thesaurus
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33312 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33316 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33321 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33335 For instance, the US English files are named:
33338 \begin_layout Itemize
33342 \begin_layout Itemize
33346 \begin_layout Standard
33355 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33356 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33359 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33360 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33361 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33368 ) to the path where they are installed.
33372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33373 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33374 ies, typical locations are
33380 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33384 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33388 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33391 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33397 LibreOffice-<Version>
33404 On the Mac, the default location is
33406 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33407 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33408 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33409 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33410 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33411 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33419 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33420 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33421 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33425 \begin_layout Standard
33426 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33427 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33431 \begin_layout Itemize
33432 \begin_inset Flex URL
33435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33437 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33445 \begin_layout Standard
33446 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33447 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33449 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33450 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33451 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33453 \begin_inset space ~
33458 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33460 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33461 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33465 \begin_layout Standard
33466 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33468 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33471 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33477 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33480 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33481 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33490 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33491 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33498 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33501 \begin_layout Subsection
33502 Using the thesaurus
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33506 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33511 or the toolbar button
33514 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33517 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33519 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33521 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33522 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33523 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33532 ), related terms (such as
33535 \begin_inset space ~
33544 ), compounds (such as
33547 \begin_inset space ~
33556 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33565 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33569 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33570 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33575 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33576 the dictionary, such as the above
33580 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33585 \begin_inset space \space{}
33588 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33589 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33590 For example, looking up the word form
33594 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33599 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33604 \begin_inset space \space{}
33615 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33616 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33617 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33620 \begin_layout Section
33622 \begin_inset Index idx
33625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 \begin_inset Index idx
33635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 Document ! Change Tracking
33642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33644 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33651 \begin_layout Standard
33652 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33653 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33654 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33655 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33662 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33673 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33687 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33688 You can change the color in
33690 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33691 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33693 \begin_inset space ~
33697 \begin_inset space ~
33702 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33708 \begin_inset Index idx
33711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33712 Color ! Change tracking
33717 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33718 's status bar when the
33719 cursor is in changed text.
33720 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33723 arg "changes-merge"
33729 \begin_layout Standard
33730 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33732 \begin_inset Index idx
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33744 \begin_layout Standard
33745 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33752 \begin_inset Graphics
33753 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33761 \begin_layout Standard
33762 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33768 \begin_layout Standard
33769 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33772 \begin_layout Standard
33773 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33779 \begin_layout Standard
33780 \begin_inset Tabular
33781 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33782 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33783 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33784 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33794 arg "changes-track"
33802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33810 \begin_inset space ~
33813 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33815 \begin_inset space ~
33824 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33833 arg "changes-output"
33841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33849 \begin_inset space ~
33852 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33862 \begin_inset space ~
33871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33892 Jumps to the next change
33898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33907 arg "change-accept"
33915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33923 \begin_inset space ~
33926 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33928 \begin_inset space ~
33937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33946 arg "change-reject"
33954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33965 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33967 \begin_inset space ~
33976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33985 arg "changes-merge"
33993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34004 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34024 arg "all-changes-accept"
34032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34040 \begin_inset space ~
34043 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34049 \begin_inset space ~
34058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 arg "all-changes-reject"
34075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34086 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34092 \begin_inset space ~
34101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34125 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34161 \begin_inset space ~
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34205 \begin_layout Standard
34206 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34207 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34208 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34209 the next change after the current cursor position.
34210 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34211 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34212 step to the next change.
34213 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34218 to describe a change.
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34228 \begin_inset Index idx
34231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34233 -packages ! dvipost
34239 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34241 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34247 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34251 \begin_layout Section
34252 Comparison of Documents
34253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34255 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34260 \begin_inset Index idx
34263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34264 Comparison of documents
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34280 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34281 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34283 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34285 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34289 \begin_inset space ~
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_inset space ~
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34314 \begin_inset space ~
34318 \begin_inset space ~
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34326 \begin_inset space ~
34331 enables the change tracking option
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34338 \begin_inset space ~
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34347 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34350 \begin_layout Section
34351 International Support
34352 \begin_inset Index idx
34355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34356 International support
34364 \begin_layout Standard
34365 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34366 with any language you want.
34367 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34368 up \SpecialChar LyX
34370 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34372 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34381 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34388 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34395 \begin_layout Subsection
34397 \begin_inset Index idx
34400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34407 \begin_inset Index idx
34410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34411 Document ! Settings
34417 \begin_inset Index idx
34420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34421 Document ! Language
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34433 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34436 dialog lets you set
34438 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34448 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34453 \begin_inset space ~
34458 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34459 For details about the different encoding options see section
34460 \begin_inset space ~
34464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34466 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34473 \begin_layout Subsection
34474 Keyboard mapping configuration
34475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34477 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 If you have for example a U.
34486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34489 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34490 can use an alternate keymap.
34491 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34497 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34498 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34501 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34508 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34513 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34514 which one you want to use.
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34519 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34520 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34524 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34525 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34526 one to support the characters you want.
34527 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34534 \begin_layout Chapter
34537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34539 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34546 \begin_layout Standard
34547 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34548 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34549 topic inside the user's guide.
34552 \begin_layout Section
34554 \begin_inset Index idx
34557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34566 \begin_layout Standard
34571 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34574 \begin_layout Subsection
34578 \begin_layout Standard
34579 Creates a new document.
34582 \begin_layout Subsection
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34587 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34588 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34589 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34592 \begin_layout Subsection
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34600 \begin_layout Subsection
34604 \begin_layout Standard
34605 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34606 Click there on a file to open it.
34609 \begin_layout Subsection
34613 \begin_layout Standard
34614 Closes the current document.
34617 \begin_layout Subsection
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 Closes all opened documents.
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34630 Saves the actual document.
34633 \begin_layout Subsection
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34641 \begin_layout Subsection
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 Saves all opened documents.
34649 \begin_layout Subsection
34653 \begin_layout Standard
34654 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34657 \begin_layout Subsection
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34662 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34663 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34664 It is described in the section
34666 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34671 Additional Features
34676 \begin_layout Subsection
34680 \begin_layout Standard
34681 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34682 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34684 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34685 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34689 \begin_layout Standard
34690 When using the menu entry
34693 \begin_inset space ~
34698 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34715 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34716 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34719 \begin_layout Subsection
34721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34723 name "subsec:Export"
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 You can export your document to various file formats.
34732 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34734 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34735 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34736 during its configuration.
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34740 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34742 \begin_inset space ~
34746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34748 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34755 \begin_layout Description
34761 \begin_inset space ~
34764 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34769 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34770 \begin_inset Newline newline
34773 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34774 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34778 \begin_layout Description
34779 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34785 \begin_layout Description
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34790 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34796 \begin_layout Description
34797 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34798 's native DVI-format.
34799 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34800 files paths or file names in your document.
34802 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34809 \begin_layout Description
34810 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34811 in files paths or file names
34814 \begin_layout Description
34816 \begin_inset space ~
34823 ) DVI-format using the program
34825 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34828 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34840 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34848 \begin_layout Description
34850 \begin_inset space ~
34853 (cropped) the same as
34857 but with cropped page margins.
34860 \begin_layout Description
34862 \begin_inset space ~
34865 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34869 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34874 \begin_layout Description
34878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34886 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34894 \begin_layout Description
34896 \begin_inset space ~
34900 \begin_inset space ~
34903 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34907 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34915 \begin_layout Description
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34928 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34929 source that is compilable with the program
34931 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34935 \begin_layout Description
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34944 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34945 source, additionally all images used in the document
34946 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34950 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34953 \begin_layout Description
34957 \begin_inset space ~
34962 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34963 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34964 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34972 \begin_layout Description
34976 \begin_inset space ~
34985 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34986 source that is compilable with the program
34992 \begin_layout Description
34994 \begin_inset space ~
34998 \begin_inset space ~
35005 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35006 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35012 \begin_layout Description
35014 \begin_inset space ~
35017 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35018 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35024 \begin_inset space \space{}
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35048 represent the version number)
35051 \begin_layout Description
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35060 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35061 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35062 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35066 \begin_layout Description
35067 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35068 's internal XHTML engine
35071 \begin_layout Description
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35088 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35093 For the conversion the program
35102 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35105 \begin_layout Description
35106 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35111 \begin_layout Description
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35116 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35118 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35121 For the conversion the program
35130 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35133 \begin_layout Description
35135 \begin_inset space ~
35138 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35139 For the conversion the program
35148 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35151 \begin_layout Description
35153 \begin_inset space ~
35156 (cropped) the same as
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35164 but with cropped page margins
35167 \begin_layout Description
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35176 PDF-format using the program
35180 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35183 \begin_layout Description
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35199 \begin_inset space ~
35204 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35209 \begin_inset space \space{}
35212 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35216 \begin_layout Description
35220 \begin_inset space ~
35225 PDF-format using the program
35227 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35230 , produces PDF-files directly
35233 \begin_layout Description
35237 \begin_inset space ~
35242 PDF-format using the program
35246 , produces PDF-files directly
35249 \begin_layout Description
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35258 PDF-format using the program
35262 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35265 \begin_layout Description
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35274 PDF-format using the program
35279 , produces PDF-files directly
35282 \begin_layout Description
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35294 \begin_layout Description
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35307 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35308 and then exported as text using the program
35313 \begin_layout Description
35318 PostScript format using the program
35326 options see section
35327 \begin_inset space ~
35331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35333 reference "subsec:General-output"
35340 \begin_layout Description
35341 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35342 source and also code in the statistical programming
35356 it is possible to use
35360 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 If one of the menu entries
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35381 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35383 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35391 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35396 \begin_inset Index idx
35399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35400 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35409 \begin_layout Subsection
35413 \begin_layout Standard
35414 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35415 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35418 \begin_inset space ~
35422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35424 reference "sec:Paths"
35429 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35438 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35439 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35440 's preferences as described in section
35441 \begin_inset space ~
35445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35447 reference "subsec:Converters"
35454 \begin_layout Subsection
35455 New and Close Window
35458 \begin_layout Standard
35459 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35463 \begin_layout Subsection
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35471 \begin_layout Section
35473 \begin_inset Index idx
35476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35485 \begin_layout Subsection
35489 \begin_layout Standard
35490 Described in section
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35497 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35504 \begin_layout Subsection
35505 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35508 \begin_layout Standard
35509 Described in section
35510 \begin_inset space ~
35514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35516 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35523 \begin_layout Subsection
35527 \begin_layout Standard
35528 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35529 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35532 \begin_layout Subsection
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35537 Selects the whole document.
35540 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 Find & Replace (Quick)
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 Described in section
35546 \begin_inset space ~
35550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35552 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35559 \begin_layout Subsection
35560 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35563 \begin_layout Standard
35564 Described in section
35565 \begin_inset space ~
35569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35571 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35578 \begin_layout Subsection
35579 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35587 \begin_layout Subsection
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35592 Described in section
35593 \begin_inset space ~
35597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35599 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35606 \begin_layout Subsection
35608 \begin_inset Index idx
35611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35612 Paragraph ! Settings
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35622 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35626 \begin_layout Standard
35627 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35628 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35637 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_layout Subsection
35646 Table and Rows & Columns
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35650 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35651 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35652 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35655 \begin_layout Subsection
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35660 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35661 It will dissolve this inset.
35662 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35666 \begin_layout Subsection
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35671 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35672 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35675 \begin_layout Subsection
35676 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35679 \begin_layout Standard
35680 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35682 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35689 reference "sec:Nesting"
35694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35696 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35703 \begin_layout Subsection
35706 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35709 \begin_layout Standard
35710 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35711 nts of the same type.
35713 \begin_inset space ~
35717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35719 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35723 for an explanation.
35726 \begin_layout Section
35728 \begin_inset Index idx
35731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35740 \begin_layout Standard
35741 At the bottom of the
35745 menu the opened documents are listed.
35748 \begin_layout Subsection
35749 Open/Close all Insets
35752 \begin_layout Standard
35753 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35756 \begin_layout Subsection
35757 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35761 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35764 \begin_layout Standard
35765 Math macros are described in the
35772 \begin_layout Subsection
35776 \begin_layout Standard
35777 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35784 reference "sec:Navigating"
35789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35791 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35798 \begin_layout Subsection
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35803 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35805 \begin_inset space ~
35809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35811 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35818 \begin_layout Subsection
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35823 Opens a window showing console messages.
35824 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35829 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35830 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35831 is processing the document.
35834 \begin_layout Subsection
35836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35838 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35843 \begin_inset Index idx
35846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35856 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35857 All toolbars and the
35860 \begin_inset space ~
35865 can be turned on and off.
35870 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35899 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35903 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35910 \begin_layout Standard
35915 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35919 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35920 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35921 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35922 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35923 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35926 \begin_layout Standard
35928 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35935 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35942 \begin_layout Subsection
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35966 \begin_inset space ~
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35975 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35976 's main window vertically while
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35983 \begin_inset space ~
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35995 \begin_inset space ~
35999 \begin_inset space ~
36004 will split it horizontally.
36005 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36006 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36007 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36008 three or more documents at the same time.
36009 To close a split view, use the menu
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset space ~
36024 \begin_layout Subsection
36028 \begin_layout Standard
36029 Closes a split view.
36032 \begin_layout Subsection
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36037 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36038 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36039 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36040 's main window fullscreen.
36041 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36042 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36045 \begin_layout Section
36047 \begin_inset Index idx
36050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36059 \begin_layout Subsection
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36064 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36071 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36082 \begin_layout Subsection
36084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36086 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36093 \begin_layout Standard
36094 Here you can insert the following characters:
36097 \begin_layout Description
36102 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36105 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36106 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36107 -packages you have installed.
36108 You can get a complete display by checking
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36117 \begin_inset Newline newline
36121 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36129 Not all characters will be visible in the
36133 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36134 dialog (see section
36135 \begin_inset space ~
36139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36141 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36145 ) can display every character.
36153 \begin_layout Description
36154 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36158 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36167 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36168 \begin_inset space ~
36172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36174 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36181 \begin_layout Description
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36186 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36196 \begin_layout Description
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36201 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36205 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36211 \begin_layout Description
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36216 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36220 \begin_layout Description
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36225 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36229 \begin_layout Description
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36234 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36240 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36246 \begin_layout Description
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36251 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36255 \begin_layout Description
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36261 \begin_inset Index idx
36264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36271 \begin_inset Index idx
36274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36280 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36281 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36283 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36289 \begin_inset Index idx
36292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36300 \begin_inset Newline newline
36303 More information about this feature can be found in the
36309 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36315 \begin_layout Description
36316 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36318 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36319 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36323 \begin_layout Subsection
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36331 \begin_layout Description
36332 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36333 \begin_inset script superscript
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36344 \begin_layout Description
36345 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36346 \begin_inset script subscript
36348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36357 \begin_layout Description
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36362 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36369 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36376 \begin_layout Description
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36381 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36388 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36395 \begin_layout Description
36397 \begin_inset space ~
36400 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36407 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36414 \begin_layout Description
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36419 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36425 \begin_inset space \space{}
36428 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36429 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36438 To insert a fraction use the command
36443 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36447 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36456 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36463 \begin_layout Description
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36468 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36475 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36482 \begin_layout Description
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36487 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36488 \begin_inset space ~
36492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36494 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36501 \begin_layout Description
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36506 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36520 \begin_layout Description
36521 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36528 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36535 \begin_layout Description
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36540 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36541 \begin_inset space ~
36545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36547 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36554 \begin_layout Description
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36559 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36566 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36573 \begin_layout Description
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36582 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36589 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36596 \begin_layout Description
36598 \begin_inset space ~
36601 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36602 as described in section
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36609 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36616 \begin_layout Description
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36621 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36628 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36635 \begin_layout Description
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36640 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36641 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36649 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36656 \begin_layout Description
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36661 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36668 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36675 \begin_layout Description
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36684 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36691 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36698 \begin_layout Subsection
36702 \begin_layout Standard
36703 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36728 are described in section
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36735 reference "sec:toc"
36744 is described in section
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36751 reference "sec:Index"
36759 is described in section
36760 \begin_inset space ~
36764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36766 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36772 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36775 is described in section
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36782 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36789 \begin_layout Subsection
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 To insert floats, as described in section
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36801 reference "sec:Floats"
36805 and in detail the chapter
36812 \begin_inset space ~
36820 \begin_layout Subsection
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36825 To insert notes, described in section
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36832 reference "sec:Notes"
36839 \begin_layout Subsection
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36846 Branches are described in section
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36853 reference "sec:Branches"
36860 \begin_layout Subsection
36864 \begin_layout Standard
36865 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36866 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36868 An example is the document class
36869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36876 with three custom insets.
36879 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36883 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36889 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36892 \begin_layout Subsection
36894 \begin_inset Index idx
36897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36906 \begin_layout Standard
36907 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36909 For more information see chapter
36911 External Document Parts
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36920 \begin_layout Subsection
36922 \begin_inset Index idx
36925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36934 \begin_layout Standard
36935 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36936 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36943 \begin_inset space ~
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36960 dialog as described in section
36961 \begin_inset space ~
36965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36967 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36974 \begin_layout Subsection
36978 \begin_layout Standard
36983 as described in section
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36990 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36997 \begin_layout Subsection
37001 \begin_layout Standard
37006 as described in section
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37013 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37020 \begin_layout Subsection
37022 \begin_inset Index idx
37025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 \begin_inset Index idx
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37036 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37045 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37046 Floats are described in section
37047 \begin_inset space ~
37051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37053 reference "sec:Floats"
37057 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37059 Multi-page Captions
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37072 \begin_layout Subsection
37076 \begin_layout Standard
37077 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37084 reference "sec:Index"
37091 \begin_layout Subsection
37095 \begin_layout Standard
37096 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37103 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37110 \begin_layout Subsection
37114 \begin_layout Standard
37115 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37116 Tables are described in section
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37123 reference "sec:Tables"
37127 and in detail in the chapter
37134 \begin_inset space ~
37142 \begin_layout Subsection
37146 \begin_layout Standard
37152 Graphics are described in section
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37159 reference "sec:Graphics"
37166 \begin_layout Subsection
37170 \begin_layout Standard
37171 Inserts a URL as described in section
37172 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37178 reference "subsec:URLs"
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37197 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37209 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37216 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37223 \begin_layout Subsection
37227 \begin_layout Standard
37228 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37235 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37242 \begin_layout Subsection
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37247 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37248 title or caption of a float.
37249 Inserts a short title as described in section
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37256 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37263 \begin_layout Subsection
37268 \begin_layout Standard
37269 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37270 Code box as described in section
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37277 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37284 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 \begin_inset Index idx
37289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37298 \begin_layout Standard
37299 Inserts a program listings box.
37300 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37302 Program Code Listings
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37315 \begin_layout Subsection
37319 \begin_layout Standard
37320 Inserts the actual date.
37321 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37325 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37341 \begin_layout Subsection
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37346 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37353 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37360 \begin_layout Section
37362 \begin_inset Index idx
37365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37374 \begin_layout Standard
37375 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37379 of the current document.
37380 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37383 \begin_layout Subsection
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37389 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37390 to jump, for example, between section
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37395 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37399 2.5 and use the submenu
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37429 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37433 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37439 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37442 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37445 \begin_layout Standard
37446 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37455 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37463 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37466 \begin_layout Subsection
37467 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37470 \begin_layout Standard
37471 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37475 \begin_layout Subsection
37479 \begin_layout Standard
37480 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37481 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37482 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37498 \begin_layout Subsection
37502 \begin_layout Standard
37503 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37506 The \SpecialChar LyX
37507 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37509 \begin_inset space ~
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37522 manual for a detailed description.
37525 \begin_layout Section
37527 \begin_inset Index idx
37530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37539 \begin_layout Subsection
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 Change Tracking is described in section
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37551 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37558 \begin_layout Subsection
37566 \begin_layout Standard
37567 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37568 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37569 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37571 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37572 to the clipboard or update the view.
37573 \begin_inset Newline newline
37576 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37583 Open Containing Directory
37585 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37586 's temporary folder for the document.
37587 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37588 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37589 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37590 For example some journals require to send the
37594 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37598 \begin_layout Subsection
37599 Start Appendix Here
37602 \begin_layout Standard
37603 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37604 as described in section
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37611 reference "sec:Appendices"
37618 \begin_layout Subsection
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_layout Standard
37627 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37628 default output format for the document (menu
37630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37631 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37632 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37650 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37654 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37658 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37660 \begin_inset space ~
37663 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37668 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37686 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37690 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37691 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37693 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37694 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37696 \begin_inset space ~
37699 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37704 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37714 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37719 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37720 when it is first configured.
37721 The default output format is
37724 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_layout Subsection
37733 View (Other Formats)
37736 \begin_layout Standard
37737 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37738 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37739 actual document with an external program.
37740 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37741 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37742 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37744 All possible formats are listed in section
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37751 reference "subsec:Export"
37756 You should at least see the menu entry
37761 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37763 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37771 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37776 \begin_inset Index idx
37779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37780 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37789 \begin_layout Standard
37790 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37791 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37794 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37799 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37804 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37814 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37819 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37820 when it is first configured.
37823 \begin_layout Subsection
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37833 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37836 \begin_layout Subsection
37837 Update (Other Formats)
37840 \begin_layout Standard
37841 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37842 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37845 \begin_layout Subsection
37846 View Master Document
37849 \begin_layout Standard
37850 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37866 \begin_inset space ~
37871 manual for more information on this topic).
37872 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37873 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37886 generates the output of the whole book, while
37890 will just output the chapter alone.
37893 \begin_layout Standard
37894 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37895 in the document settings (menu
37897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37898 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37899 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37911 \begin_inset space ~
37915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37917 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37921 ) or in the preferences (menu
37923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37924 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37929 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37931 \begin_inset space ~
37934 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37936 \begin_inset space ~
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37946 \begin_inset space ~
37950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37952 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37959 \begin_layout Subsection
37960 Update Master Document
37963 \begin_layout Standard
37964 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37980 \begin_inset space ~
37985 manual for more information on this topic).
37986 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37987 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37990 \begin_layout Standard
37991 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37992 in the document settings (menu
37994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37996 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38002 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38014 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38018 ) or in the preferences (menu
38020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38021 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38026 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38031 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38049 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38056 \begin_layout Subsection
38058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38060 name "subsec:Compressed"
38067 \begin_layout Standard
38068 Un/compresses the current document.
38069 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38070 compression (see the
38072 Additional Features
38074 manual for details).
38077 \begin_layout Subsection
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38085 \begin_layout Subsection
38089 \begin_layout Standard
38090 The document settings are described in appendix
38091 \begin_inset space ~
38095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38097 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38104 \begin_layout Section
38106 \begin_inset Index idx
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38118 \begin_layout Subsection
38122 \begin_layout Standard
38123 Spell checking is explained in section
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38130 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38137 \begin_layout Subsection
38141 \begin_layout Standard
38142 The thesaurus is described in section
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38149 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38156 \begin_layout Subsection
38158 \begin_inset Index idx
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38168 \begin_inset Index idx
38171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38182 the highlighted document part.
38185 \begin_layout Subsection
38191 \begin_inset Index idx
38194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38195 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38204 \begin_layout Standard
38205 Generates with the help of the program
38207 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38210 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38211 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38212 This feature is not available on Windows.
38215 \begin_layout Subsection
38221 \begin_inset Index idx
38224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38234 \begin_layout Standard
38235 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38240 \begin_inset space ~
38245 to see the full filename paths.
38248 \begin_layout Subsection
38250 \begin_inset Index idx
38253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38262 \begin_layout Standard
38263 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38264 files as described in section
38265 \begin_inset space ~
38269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38271 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38278 \begin_layout Subsection
38280 \begin_inset Index idx
38283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38296 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38314 \begin_inset Index idx
38317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38318 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38327 \begin_layout Standard
38328 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38329 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38330 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38331 -packages and programs it needs; see
38333 \begin_inset space ~
38337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38339 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38346 \begin_layout Subsection
38350 \begin_layout Standard
38355 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38362 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38369 \begin_layout Section
38371 \begin_inset Index idx
38374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38383 \begin_layout Standard
38384 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38385 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38387 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38391 \begin_layout Standard
38395 \begin_inset space ~
38400 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38401 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38402 packages and classes found
38403 by \SpecialChar LyX
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38411 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38418 \begin_layout Standard
38422 \begin_inset space ~
38427 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38432 \begin_layout Section
38434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38436 name "sec:Toolbars"
38443 \begin_layout Standard
38444 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38451 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38458 \begin_layout Standard
38459 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38460 This is described in the
38462 Additional Features
38467 \begin_layout Subsection
38469 \begin_inset Index idx
38472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38481 \begin_layout Standard
38482 \begin_inset Graphics
38483 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38491 \begin_layout Standard
38492 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38498 \begin_layout Standard
38499 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 \begin_inset Note Note
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38525 manual for more information.
38533 \begin_layout Standard
38534 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38540 \begin_layout Standard
38541 \begin_inset Tabular
38542 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38543 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38545 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 \begin_inset Graphics
38552 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38566 pull-down box for the environments
38579 \begin_layout Standard
38580 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38586 \begin_layout Standard
38588 \begin_inset Tabular
38589 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38590 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38591 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38592 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38616 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38692 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 arg "spelling-continuously"
38730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38734 Spellcheck continuously
38740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38823 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38899 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38953 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38996 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 Emphasize text, function of the
39026 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39031 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39061 Set text to noun style, function of the
39063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39065 \begin_inset space ~
39068 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 arg "textstyle-apply"
39094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 Format text using the current settings in the
39100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39105 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39138 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39140 \begin_inset space ~
39149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39158 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 arg "tabular-insert"
39194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 Toggle outline window on/off,
39230 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39273 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39298 \begin_layout Subsection
39300 \begin_inset Index idx
39303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39312 \begin_layout Standard
39313 \begin_inset Graphics
39314 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39322 \begin_layout Standard
39323 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39329 \begin_layout Standard
39330 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39335 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39341 \begin_layout Standard
39342 \begin_inset Tabular
39343 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39344 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39345 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39346 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 arg "layout Enumerate"
39391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39410 arg "layout Itemize"
39418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 arg "layout Description"
39472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39491 arg "depth-increment"
39499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39511 \begin_inset space ~
39520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39529 arg "depth-decrement"
39537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 arg "float-insert figure"
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39582 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39598 arg "float-insert table"
39606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39613 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39659 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39735 \begin_inset space ~
39744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39753 arg "nomencl-insert"
39761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39787 arg "footnote-insert"
39795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39817 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39866 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39886 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39995 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40028 \begin_inset space ~
40037 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40046 arg "dialog-show character"
40054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40065 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40081 arg "layout-paragraph"
40089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40095 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40115 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40129 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40143 \begin_layout Subsection
40144 View/Update Toolbar
40145 \begin_inset Index idx
40148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40149 Toolbar ! View / Update
40157 \begin_layout Standard
40158 \begin_inset Graphics
40159 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40166 \begin_layout Standard
40167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40178 \begin_layout Standard
40179 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40185 \begin_layout Standard
40186 \begin_inset Tabular
40187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40188 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40189 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40190 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40230 arg "buffer-update"
40238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40260 arg "master-buffer-view"
40268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40294 arg "master-buffer-update"
40302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40346 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40347 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40348 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40349 Synchronize with Output
40355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40379 View (Other Formats)
40385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40392 arg "update-others"
40400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40406 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40407 Update (Other Formats)
40420 \begin_layout Standard
40421 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40425 \begin_layout Subsection
40429 \begin_layout Standard
40430 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40437 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40441 , the table toolbar
40442 \begin_inset Index idx
40445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40459 manual and the math macro toolbar
40460 \begin_inset Index idx
40463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40476 \begin_layout Chapter
40477 The Document Settings
40478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40480 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40485 \begin_inset Index idx
40488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40489 Document ! Settings
40497 \begin_layout Standard
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40506 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40507 is called with the menu
40509 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40513 You can save your document settings as default with the
40515 Save as Document Defaults
40517 button in any dialog.
40518 This will create a template named
40522 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40523 when you create a new document without
40527 \begin_layout Standard
40532 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40533 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40536 \begin_layout Standard
40537 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40538 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40539 to find the one you are looking for.
40540 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40541 the submenus of the dialog.
40543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40547 \begin_inset space \space{}
40551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40558 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40559 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40560 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40563 \begin_layout Section
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40570 Document classes are described in section
40571 \begin_inset space ~
40575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40577 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40585 \begin_layout Standard
40589 \begin_inset space ~
40594 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40599 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40600 as a layout for a document class.
40601 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40603 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40613 Some classes use special class options by default.
40614 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40618 and you can decide to use them or not.
40619 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40620 recommended you leave them untouched.
40625 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40626 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40631 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40633 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40639 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40640 \begin_inset Newline newline
40645 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40648 \begin_inset Newline newline
40651 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40652 distribution, see section
40657 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40659 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40671 \begin_layout Standard
40676 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40677 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40678 in the background if the child document
40679 is opened without its master.
40680 This way child documents are always compilable.
40681 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40697 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40708 \begin_inset Index idx
40711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40713 -packages ! prettyref
40719 \begin_inset Index idx
40722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40724 -packages ! refstyle
40729 for cross-references, see section
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40736 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40743 \begin_layout Section
40747 \begin_layout Standard
40748 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40749 Please refer to the section
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40765 manual for details.
40768 \begin_layout Section
40772 \begin_layout Standard
40773 Modules are explained in section
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40780 reference "subsec:Modules"
40787 \begin_layout Section
40791 \begin_layout Standard
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40799 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40806 \begin_layout Section
40810 \begin_layout Standard
40811 The document font settings are described in section
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40818 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40825 \begin_layout Section
40829 \begin_layout Standard
40830 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40847 and whether it should be a
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40855 can also be specified here.
40858 \begin_layout Standard
40859 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40860 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40861 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40863 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40869 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40872 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40873 justifies the text on screen.
40874 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40878 \begin_layout Section
40882 \begin_layout Standard
40883 This dialog is described in sections
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40890 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40897 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40904 \begin_layout Section
40908 \begin_layout Standard
40909 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40916 reference "subsec:Margins"
40923 \begin_layout Section
40925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40927 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40932 \begin_inset Index idx
40935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40936 Language ! Encoding
40944 \begin_layout Standard
40945 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40946 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40947 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40949 is always encoded in utf8).
40950 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40951 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40952 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40953 -command is not known for
40954 a particular character).
40957 \begin_layout Standard
40958 If you use the option
40963 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40964 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40965 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40967 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40968 exactly one encoding.
40969 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40974 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40975 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40976 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40977 installation supports Unicode), choose
40978 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40979 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40980 is quite incomplete, so
40981 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40986 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40987 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40988 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40989 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40990 -commands is not used, because all
40991 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40992 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40993 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40994 , two new alternative engines
40995 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40997 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40999 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41030 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41035 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41039 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41042 \begin_layout Standard
41046 \begin_inset space ~
41051 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41052 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41062 The possible settings are:
41065 \begin_layout Description
41066 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41068 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41069 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41079 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41086 \begin_layout Description
41087 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41088 format you will use.
41089 In many cases this will be
41094 \begin_inset Index idx
41097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41105 If the newer package
41110 \begin_inset Index idx
41113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41115 -packages ! polyglossia
41120 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41121 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41122 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41124 this package will be used instead of
41131 \begin_layout Description
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41144 would be more appropriate.
41147 \begin_layout Description
41148 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41149 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41153 (for German texts), type in
41156 \begin_inset Newline newline
41161 usepackage{ngerman}
41164 \begin_layout Description
41165 None will not use a language package.
41166 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41169 \begin_layout Standard
41170 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41173 \begin_layout Description
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset space ~
41190 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41196 \begin_inset Index idx
41199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41201 -packages ! inputenc
41207 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41208 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41209 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41213 \begin_layout Description
41214 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41216 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41217 commands, which may result in a big
41218 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41219 -commands are needed.
41222 \begin_layout Description
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41231 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41234 \begin_layout Description
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41243 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41246 \begin_layout Description
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41251 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41254 \begin_layout Description
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_inset space ~
41263 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41264 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41267 \begin_layout Description
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41280 \begin_layout Description
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41290 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41306 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_layout Description
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41326 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41327 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41330 \begin_layout Description
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41339 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41340 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41341 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41342 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41362 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41363 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41364 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41366 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_layout Description
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41386 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41389 \begin_layout Description
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41395 \begin_inset space ~
41398 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41401 \begin_layout Description
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41410 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41413 \begin_layout Description
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41418 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41421 \begin_layout Description
41423 \begin_inset space ~
41426 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41429 \begin_layout Description
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41438 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41441 \begin_layout Description
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_layout Description
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41459 \begin_inset space ~
41462 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41465 \begin_layout Description
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41477 \begin_layout Description
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41486 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41492 \begin_inset Index idx
41495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41502 , when using this, set the document language to
41507 \begin_layout Description
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41516 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41521 , when using this, set the document language to
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_layout Description
41532 \begin_inset space ~
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41539 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41545 \begin_inset Index idx
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41550 -packages ! japanese
41555 , when using this, set the document language to
41560 \begin_layout Description
41562 \begin_inset space ~
41566 \begin_inset space ~
41569 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41574 , when using this, set the document language to
41579 \begin_layout Description
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41585 \begin_inset space ~
41588 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41593 , when using this, set the document language to
41598 \begin_layout Description
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41603 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41606 \begin_layout Description
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41619 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41622 \begin_layout Description
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41635 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41636 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41637 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41640 \begin_layout Description
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_layout Description
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41661 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41662 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41665 \begin_layout Description
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41674 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41680 \begin_inset Index idx
41683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41690 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41693 \begin_layout Description
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41706 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41713 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41716 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41723 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41724 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41726 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41729 \begin_layout Description
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41738 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41744 \begin_inset Index idx
41747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41754 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41757 \begin_layout Description
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41762 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41768 \begin_inset Index idx
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41773 -packages ! inputenc
41779 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41783 \begin_layout Description
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41793 \begin_inset space ~
41796 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41797 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_layout Description
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41816 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41817 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41818 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41822 \begin_layout Description
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41835 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41836 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41839 \begin_layout Section
41841 \begin_inset Index idx
41844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41851 \begin_inset Index idx
41854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41861 \begin_inset Index idx
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41865 Color ! Shaded boxes
41871 \begin_inset Index idx
41874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41875 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 Here you can alter the font color for the
41888 (default: black), for
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41896 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41900 (default: white) and for
41903 \begin_inset space ~
41913 sets the color back to the default.
41916 \begin_layout Standard
41917 Clicking any button showing
41925 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41926 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41927 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41928 later more quickly.
41931 \begin_layout Standard
41932 Note, if you change the
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41940 font color and use the option
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41948 in the document settings under
41951 \begin_inset space ~
41956 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41963 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41971 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41977 \begin_layout Standard
41981 \begin_inset space ~
41990 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41996 Code after a forced page break:
41999 \begin_layout Itemize
42000 For the page color:
42001 \begin_inset Newline newline
42008 pagecolor{color name}
42011 \begin_layout Itemize
42012 For the text color:
42013 \begin_inset Newline newline
42023 \begin_layout Standard
42024 You are restricted to one of
42060 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42067 \begin_inset space ~
42073 \begin_inset Newline newline
42076 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42077 names to refer to them:
42080 \begin_layout Itemize
42086 \begin_inset Newline newline
42091 page_backgroundcolor
42094 \begin_layout Itemize
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42104 \begin_inset Newline newline
42112 \begin_layout Itemize
42116 \begin_inset space ~
42122 \begin_inset Newline newline
42130 \begin_layout Itemize
42134 \begin_inset space ~
42140 \begin_inset Newline newline
42148 \begin_layout Standard
42149 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42160 \begin_inset space ~
42168 \begin_layout Section
42172 \begin_layout Standard
42173 Here you can adjust the
42177 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42181 as described in section
42182 \begin_inset space ~
42186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42188 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42195 \begin_layout Section
42199 \begin_layout Standard
42200 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42206 \begin_inset Index idx
42209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42221 \begin_inset Index idx
42224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42226 -packages ! jurabib
42234 Sectioned bibliography
42236 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42242 \begin_inset Index idx
42245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42247 -packages ! bibtopic
42252 and you can select a
42256 for the generation of the bibliography.
42257 For a further description see section
42258 \begin_inset space ~
42262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42264 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42271 \begin_layout Section
42275 \begin_layout Standard
42276 Here you can define the
42280 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42288 reference "sec:Index"
42295 \begin_layout Section
42299 \begin_layout Standard
42300 The PDF properties are explained in section
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42307 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42314 \begin_layout Section
42318 \begin_layout Standard
42319 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42320 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42326 \begin_inset Index idx
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 -packages ! amsmath
42341 \begin_inset Index idx
42344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 -packages ! amssymb
42356 \begin_inset Index idx
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42371 \begin_inset Index idx
42374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42386 \begin_inset Index idx
42389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 -packages ! mathdots
42401 \begin_inset Index idx
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 -packages ! mathtools
42416 \begin_inset Index idx
42419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42431 \begin_inset Index idx
42434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42436 -packages ! stackrel
42446 \begin_inset Index idx
42449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42451 -packages ! stmaryrd
42461 \begin_inset Index idx
42464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42466 -packages ! undertilde
42471 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42474 \begin_layout Description
42475 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42476 -errors in formulas,
42477 ensure that you have this enabled.
42480 \begin_layout Description
42481 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42482 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42483 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42487 \begin_layout Description
42488 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42503 \begin_layout Description
42504 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42519 \begin_layout Description
42520 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42531 \begin_layout Description
42532 mathtools is used for the math commands
42568 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42575 \begin_layout Description
42576 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42578 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42587 \begin_layout Description
42588 stackrel is used for the math command
42605 \begin_layout Description
42606 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42609 \begin_layout Description
42610 undertilde is used for the math command
42618 Accents for one Character
42627 \begin_layout Section
42631 \begin_layout Standard
42632 The float placement options are described in the section
42635 \begin_inset space ~
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42651 \begin_layout Section
42655 \begin_layout Standard
42656 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42658 Program Code Listings
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42671 \begin_layout Section
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42676 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42684 set to be used and set the
42689 The itemize environment is described in section
42690 \begin_inset space ~
42694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42696 reference "sec:Itemize"
42703 \begin_layout Standard
42704 You can furthermore specify a
42707 \begin_inset space ~
42712 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42713 command of the desired character.
42714 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42721 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42727 \begin_inset space \space{}
42731 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42741 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42742 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42745 \begin_layout Standard
42746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42754 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42755 -packages in the preamble (menu
42758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42759 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42762 \begin_inset space ~
42768 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42772 usepackage{textcomp}
42775 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42779 usepackage{amssymb}
42789 \begin_layout Section
42793 \begin_layout Standard
42794 Branches are described in section
42795 \begin_inset space ~
42799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42801 reference "sec:Branches"
42808 \begin_layout Section
42810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42812 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42823 \begin_layout Description
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42832 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42852 View Master Document
42853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42860 Update Master Document
42861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42868 menu or the toolbar.
42869 The default is set in
42871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42877 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42881 \begin_inset space ~
42885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42887 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42894 \begin_layout Description
42896 \begin_inset space ~
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42903 Output settings for the menu
42905 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42907 \begin_inset space ~
42913 For a detailed description see section
42915 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42920 \begin_inset space ~
42928 \begin_layout Description
42930 \begin_inset space ~
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42937 Options offers settings for the export format
42945 \begin_inset space ~
42950 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42951 \begin_inset space ~
42954 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42963 settings are described in detail in section
42965 Math Output in XHTML
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42979 \begin_inset space ~
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42988 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42991 \begin_layout Section
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43002 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43004 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43006 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43010 \begin_layout Standard
43011 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43012 -syntax is given in section
43013 \begin_inset space ~
43017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43019 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43026 \begin_layout Chapter
43032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43034 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43039 \begin_inset Index idx
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43051 \begin_layout Standard
43052 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43054 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43058 It has the following submenus.
43061 \begin_layout Section
43065 \begin_layout Subsection
43069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43070 User Interface File
43071 \begin_inset Index idx
43074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43075 Customization ! of toolbars
43081 \begin_inset Index idx
43084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43085 Customization ! of menus
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43094 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43095 interface (ui) file.
43096 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43104 \begin_layout Description
43109 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43112 \begin_layout Description
43119 the menu entries in popup context menus
43122 \begin_layout Description
43127 specifies the toolbar buttons
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43131 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43132 and edit the entries.
43135 \begin_layout Standard
43136 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43148 entries must be finished with an explicit
43173 and in the case of the
43174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43186 The syntax for the entries is:
43189 \begin_layout Standard
43190 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43221 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43224 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43225 -functions are listed in the menu
43227 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43229 \begin_inset space ~
43237 \begin_layout Standard
43238 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43245 For example, assuming you use the menu
43247 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43250 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43254 \begin_layout Standard
43255 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43279 \begin_layout Standard
43281 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43296 to have the sixth bookmark.
43299 \begin_layout Standard
43303 \begin_inset space ~
43308 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43309 's toolbar buttons.
43310 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43311 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43314 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43325 \begin_layout Standard
43328 Enable tool tips in main work area
43330 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43338 \begin_layout Standard
43343 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43344 should display in the menu
43346 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43356 \begin_layout Subsection
43360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43364 \begin_layout Standard
43367 Restore window layouts and geometries
43370 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43371 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43375 \begin_layout Standard
43378 Restore cursor positions
43380 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43387 Load opened files from last session
43389 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43393 \begin_layout Standard
43396 Clear all session information
43398 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43399 sessions (cursor positions, names
43400 of last opened documents, etc.).
43403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43407 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43412 \begin_inset Index idx
43415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43424 \begin_layout Standard
43427 Backup original documents when saving
43429 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43430 it was saved the last time.
43431 It is stored in the
43434 \begin_inset space ~
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43446 reference "sec:Paths"
43450 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43453 \begin_inset space ~
43459 The backup file has the file extension
43460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43474 \begin_layout Standard
43477 Backup documents, every
43479 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43482 \begin_layout Standard
43485 Save documents compressed by default
43487 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43494 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43499 This applies to newly created documents only.
43500 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43503 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43504 Windows & work area
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43510 Open documents in tabs
43512 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43521 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43528 \begin_inset space ~
43532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43534 reference "sec:Paths"
43538 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43545 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43546 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43547 of \SpecialChar LyX
43549 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43550 instance is created for each file.
43553 \begin_layout Standard
43556 Single close-tab button
43558 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43568 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43569 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43581 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43582 before the change takes effect.
43590 \begin_layout Standard
43595 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43597 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43599 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43603 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43604 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43605 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43608 \begin_layout Subsection
43610 \begin_inset Index idx
43613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43622 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43629 \begin_layout Standard
43630 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43634 \begin_layout Standard
43635 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43643 This section only deals with the fonts
43647 the \SpecialChar LyX
43649 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43653 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43665 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43682 (depends on the system) as its
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43701 \begin_layout Standard
43702 You can change the font size with the
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43714 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43719 points have the size of 1
43720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43730 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43735 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43740 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43747 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43754 \begin_layout Standard
43757 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43759 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43760 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43761 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43762 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43763 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43765 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_layout Subsection
43774 \begin_inset Index idx
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43778 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43785 \begin_inset Index idx
43788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43797 \begin_layout Standard
43798 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43799 by choosing an item in the
43800 list and selecting the
43807 \begin_layout Standard
43808 By checking the option
43812 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43815 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43820 \begin_inset space ~
43825 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43828 \begin_layout Subsection
43830 \begin_inset Index idx
43833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43842 \begin_layout Standard
43843 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43847 \begin_layout Standard
43852 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43853 This feature is described in section
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43860 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43867 \begin_layout Standard
43868 Checking the option
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43884 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43887 \begin_layout Section
43889 \begin_inset Index idx
43892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43901 \begin_layout Subsection
43905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43909 \begin_layout Standard
43912 Cursor follows scrollbar
43914 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43918 \begin_layout Standard
43919 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43920 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43921 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43924 \begin_layout Standard
43927 Scroll below end of document
43929 is self-explanatory.
43932 \begin_layout Standard
43933 In \SpecialChar LyX
43934 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43941 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43943 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43944 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43947 \begin_layout Standard
43950 Sort environments alphabetically
43952 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43955 \begin_layout Standard
43958 Group environments by their category
43960 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43963 \begin_layout Standard
43968 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43983 \begin_layout Standard
43984 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43989 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43990 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43994 \begin_layout Subsection
43996 \begin_inset Index idx
43999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44006 \begin_inset Index idx
44009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 Settings ! Shortcuts
44018 \begin_layout Standard
44023 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44025 Several binding files are available, among them:
44028 \begin_layout Description
44029 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44032 \begin_layout Description
44033 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44045 \begin_layout Description
44046 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44057 \begin_layout Standard
44058 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44063 , and binding files for special languages.
44064 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44069 \begin_inset space \space{}
44073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44081 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44082 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44083 will try to use the appropriate binding
44087 \begin_layout Standard
44088 Some binding files, like
44092 , only have a limited scope.
44093 When looking at the end of the file
44097 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44100 \begin_layout Standard
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44108 \begin_inset space ~
44113 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44114 in the selected key binding file.
44117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44121 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44126 \begin_inset Index idx
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44130 Key Bindings ! Editing
44138 \begin_layout Standard
44139 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44140 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44141 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44142 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44145 Show key-bindings containing
44148 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44149 Insert there for example as keyword
44150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44157 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44158 functions that contain
44159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44167 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44168 All \SpecialChar LyX
44169 functions are also listed in the file
44174 that you will find in the
44181 \begin_layout Standard
44182 For example, to add the shortcut
44190 , select the function and press the
44195 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44196 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44199 \begin_layout Standard
44200 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44201 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44203 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44204 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44206 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44211 \begin_layout Standard
44212 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44215 \begin_layout Standard
44216 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44218 The syntax of the entries is:
44221 \begin_layout Standard
44227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44246 \begin_layout Subsection
44248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44250 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44255 \begin_inset Index idx
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44265 \begin_inset Index idx
44268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44269 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44277 \begin_layout Standard
44278 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44279 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44280 provides keyboard maps.
44281 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44282 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44285 \begin_inset space ~
44289 \begin_inset space ~
44294 and select the keyboard map file named
44301 \begin_layout Standard
44310 keyboard map and, if you use the
44314 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44317 arg "keymap-primary"
44323 arg "keymap-secondary"
44326 respectively or toggle between them with
44329 arg "keymap-toggle"
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44353 \begin_layout Standard
44354 You can also specify the mouse
44356 Wheel scrolling speed
44359 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44363 Middle mouse button pasting
44365 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44366 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44369 \begin_layout Standard
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44386 you can select a key for zooming.
44387 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44390 \begin_layout Subsection
44394 \begin_layout Standard
44395 Input completion is described in section
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44402 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44409 \begin_layout Section
44411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44418 \begin_inset Index idx
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44428 \begin_inset Index idx
44431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44441 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44442 are normally determined during
44444 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44447 \begin_layout Description
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44452 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44453 's working directory.
44454 It is the default when you
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44473 \begin_layout Description
44475 \begin_inset space ~
44478 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44480 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44494 \begin_layout Description
44496 \begin_inset space ~
44499 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44505 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 \begin_inset Newline newline
44513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44525 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44526 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44534 \begin_layout Description
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44540 \begin_inset Index idx
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44549 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44550 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44551 \begin_inset space ~
44555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44557 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44565 will be used to save the backups.
44566 \begin_inset Newline newline
44569 Backup files have the ending
44570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44580 \begin_layout Description
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44585 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44586 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44588 \begin_inset Newline newline
44595 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44601 You can edit this file with the program
44610 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44611 in its preferences under
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44620 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44625 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44627 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44628 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44634 and \SpecialChar LyX
44635 need to be running the same time.
44636 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 The pipe is also used for the
44643 feature, see section
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44650 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44655 \begin_inset Newline newline
44658 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44659 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44660 \begin_inset Newline newline
44676 \begin_layout Description
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44681 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44684 \begin_layout Description
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44689 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44690 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44691 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44694 \begin_layout Description
44696 \begin_inset space ~
44699 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44705 You only need to specify it if you are using
44709 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44711 For \SpecialChar LyX
44716 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44720 \begin_layout Description
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44725 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44726 When \SpecialChar LyX
44727 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44728 to find it on the system.
44729 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44731 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44740 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44741 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44744 \begin_layout Description
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44749 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44750 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44751 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44752 code or in the document
44754 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44756 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44757 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44758 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44759 scanned for the input files.
44760 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44761 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44763 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44764 compilation may fail for some documents.
44767 \begin_layout Section
44771 \begin_layout Standard
44772 Here you can insert your
44781 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44789 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44793 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44796 \begin_layout Section
44798 \begin_inset Index idx
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 Language ! Settings
44808 \begin_inset Index idx
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 Settings ! Language
44820 \begin_layout Subsection
44822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44824 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44831 \begin_layout Description
44833 \begin_inset space ~
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44840 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44842 You can find its actual translation status here:
44843 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44845 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44852 \begin_layout Description
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44857 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44858 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44859 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44860 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44877 The most widespread language package is
44882 \begin_inset Index idx
44885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44892 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44894 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44895 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44896 come with the alternative
44902 \begin_inset Index idx
44905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44907 -packages ! polyglossia
44912 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44913 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44919 The available selections are described in section
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44926 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44933 \begin_layout Description
44935 \begin_inset space ~
44938 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44939 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44940 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44941 An example is the start command
44947 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44949 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44953 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44968 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44973 \begin_layout Description
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44983 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44984 command toggles the package on and off.
44987 \begin_layout Description
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44996 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45000 \begin_layout Description
45002 \begin_inset space ~
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45009 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45013 \begin_layout Description
45015 \begin_inset space ~
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45022 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45023 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45024 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45026 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45033 \begin_layout Description
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45038 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45040 When this option is not set, the
45043 \begin_inset space ~
45048 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45050 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45061 \begin_layout Description
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45075 When it is not set, the
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45083 is set to the end of the document.
45086 \begin_layout Description
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45095 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45096 language will be underlined in blue.
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45108 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45109 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45112 \begin_layout Description
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45117 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45118 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45119 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45120 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45123 \begin_layout Subsection
45127 \begin_layout Standard
45128 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45135 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45142 \begin_layout Section
45146 \begin_layout Subsection
45148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45150 name "subsec:General-output"
45157 \begin_layout Description
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45162 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45164 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45166 \begin_inset space ~
45172 For a detailed description see section
45174 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_layout Description
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45192 Options Options for the program
45196 that is used for the export format
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45207 reference "subsec:Export"
45212 Possible options are listed in the
45217 \begin_inset Newline newline
45221 \begin_inset Flex URL
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45236 \begin_layout Description
45238 \begin_inset space ~
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45245 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45248 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45249 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45257 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45260 \begin_layout Description
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45266 \begin_inset Index idx
45269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45276 \begin_inset Index idx
45279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45280 Settings ! Date format
45285 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45286 \begin_inset Newline newline
45290 \begin_inset Flex URL
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45295 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45301 \begin_inset Newline newline
45304 For example the format
45305 \begin_inset Newline newline
45309 \begin_inset Newline newline
45312 prints the date as day/month/year.
45315 \begin_layout Description
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45324 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45325 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45328 \begin_layout Subsection
45334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45336 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45341 \begin_inset Index idx
45344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45345 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45354 \begin_layout Description
45356 \begin_inset space ~
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45368 \begin_inset space ~
45371 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45376 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45397 are used for Cyrillic.
45398 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45411 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45413 sets up in the background.
45414 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45417 \begin_layout Description
45419 \begin_inset space ~
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45431 \begin_inset space ~
45434 options They only have an effect when the program
45438 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45441 \begin_layout Standard
45442 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45443 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45444 manuals of the applications.
45447 \begin_layout Description
45449 \begin_inset space ~
45452 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45453 \begin_inset space ~
45457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45459 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45466 \begin_layout Description
45468 \begin_inset space ~
45471 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45478 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45485 \begin_layout Description
45487 \begin_inset space ~
45490 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45491 \begin_inset space ~
45495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45497 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45504 \begin_layout Description
45510 \begin_inset space ~
45513 command Command for the program
45515 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45518 that is described in the section
45520 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45525 Additional Features
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 There are additionally the following options:
45534 \begin_layout Description
45536 \begin_inset space ~
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset space ~
45548 \begin_inset space ~
45553 \begin_inset space ~
45556 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45574 to separate folders.
45575 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45577 \begin_inset Index idx
45580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45587 \begin_inset Index idx
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 \begin_layout Description
45601 \begin_inset space ~
45605 \begin_inset space ~
45609 \begin_inset space ~
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45617 \begin_inset space ~
45621 \begin_inset space ~
45624 changes Removes all manually set
45630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45631 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45633 \begin_inset space ~
45638 dialog when changing the document class.
45641 \begin_layout Section
45643 \begin_inset space ~
45647 \begin_inset Index idx
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 \begin_layout Subsection
45661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45663 name "subsec:Converters"
45668 \begin_inset Index idx
45671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45680 \begin_layout Standard
45681 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45682 from one format to another.
45683 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45684 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45691 \begin_inset space ~
45696 field and press the
45701 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45710 drop-down list, modify the
45714 field and press the
45721 \begin_layout Standard
45724 Converter File Cache
45730 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45732 Maximum Age (in days
45735 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45736 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45739 \begin_layout Standard
45740 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45741 definition, is described in the section
45752 \begin_layout Subsection
45754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45756 name "sec:File-Formats"
45761 \begin_inset Index idx
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 \begin_inset Index idx
45774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45783 \begin_layout Standard
45784 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45794 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45797 \begin_layout Standard
45798 You can also define the
45800 Default output format
45802 that is used when you use
45804 View, Update, View Master Document
45808 Update Master Document
45814 menu or the toolbar.
45817 \begin_layout Standard
45818 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45829 \begin_layout Standard
45830 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45832 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45833 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45834 This is done by specifying a
45839 More about this is described in the section
45850 \begin_layout Chapter
45851 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45853 \begin_inset Index idx
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45865 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45872 \begin_layout Standard
45874 \begin_inset space ~
45878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45880 reference "tab:Units"
45884 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45885 and used in this documentation.
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45889 \begin_inset Float table
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 \begin_inset Tabular
45923 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45924 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45925 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45926 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45927 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46133 scaled point (65536
46134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46212 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 % of original image width
46290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 \begin_layout Chapter
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46605 name "chap:Credits"
46612 \begin_layout Standard
46613 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46614 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46617 \begin_layout Itemize
46620 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46623 \begin_layout Itemize
46629 \begin_layout Itemize
46635 \begin_layout Itemize
46641 \begin_layout Itemize
46647 \begin_layout Itemize
46653 \begin_layout Itemize
46659 \begin_layout Itemize
46665 \begin_layout Itemize
46668 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46671 \begin_layout Itemize
46677 \begin_layout Itemize
46683 \begin_layout Itemize
46689 \begin_layout Itemize
46695 \begin_layout Itemize
46701 \begin_layout Itemize
46707 \begin_layout Itemize
46713 \begin_layout Itemize
46719 \begin_layout Itemize
46720 The \SpecialChar LyX
46722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46731 \begin_layout Standard
46732 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46735 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46742 \begin_layout Bibliography
46743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46744 LatexCommand bibitem
46750 The \SpecialChar LyX
46752 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46755 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46760 \begin_inset Newline newline
46764 \begin_inset Flex URL
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46777 \begin_layout Bibliography
46778 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46779 LatexCommand bibitem
46780 key "latexcompanion"
46784 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46786 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46787 Companion Second Edition.
46790 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46793 \begin_layout Bibliography
46794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46795 LatexCommand bibitem
46800 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46803 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46807 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46810 \begin_layout Bibliography
46811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46812 LatexCommand bibitem
46820 : A Document Preparation System.
46823 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46826 \begin_layout Bibliography
46827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46828 LatexCommand bibitem
46837 The \SpecialChar TeX
46841 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46844 \begin_layout Bibliography
46845 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46846 LatexCommand bibitem
46851 The \SpecialChar TeX
46853 \begin_inset Newline newline
46857 \begin_inset Flex URL
46860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46862 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46870 \begin_layout Bibliography
46871 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46872 LatexCommand bibitem
46877 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46879 \begin_inset Newline newline
46883 \begin_inset Flex URL
46886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46888 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46896 \begin_layout Bibliography
46897 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46898 LatexCommand bibitem
46904 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46906 name "Documentation"
46907 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46913 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46917 \begin_inset Newline newline
46921 \begin_inset Flex URL
46924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46926 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46934 \begin_layout Bibliography
46935 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46936 LatexCommand bibitem
46942 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46944 name "Documentation"
46945 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46949 how to use the program
46951 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46955 \begin_inset Newline newline
46959 \begin_inset Flex URL
46962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46964 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46972 \begin_layout Bibliography
46973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46974 LatexCommand bibitem
46980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46982 name "Documentation"
46983 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46992 \begin_inset Newline newline
46996 \begin_inset Flex URL
46999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47001 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47009 \begin_layout Bibliography
47010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47011 LatexCommand bibitem
47012 key "makeindex-man"
47017 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47020 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47029 \begin_inset Newline newline
47033 \begin_inset Flex URL
47036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47038 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47046 \begin_layout Bibliography
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47048 LatexCommand bibitem
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47056 name "Documentation"
47057 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47066 \begin_inset Newline newline
47070 \begin_inset Flex URL
47073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47075 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47083 \begin_layout Bibliography
47084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47085 LatexCommand bibitem
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47093 name "Documentation"
47094 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47098 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47100 \begin_inset Newline newline
47104 \begin_inset Flex URL
47107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47109 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47117 \begin_layout Bibliography
47118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47119 LatexCommand bibitem
47125 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47127 name "Documentation"
47128 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47132 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47138 \begin_inset Index idx
47141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47143 -packages ! caption
47149 \begin_inset Newline newline
47153 \begin_inset Flex URL
47156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47158 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47166 \begin_layout Bibliography
47167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47168 LatexCommand bibitem
47174 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47176 name "Documentation"
47177 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47181 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47187 \begin_inset Index idx
47190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47192 -packages ! enumitem
47198 \begin_inset Newline newline
47202 \begin_inset Flex URL
47205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47207 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47215 \begin_layout Bibliography
47216 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47217 LatexCommand bibitem
47223 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47225 name "Documentation"
47226 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47230 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47236 \begin_inset Index idx
47239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47241 -packages ! fancyhdr
47247 \begin_inset Newline newline
47251 \begin_inset Flex URL
47254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47256 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47264 \begin_layout Bibliography
47265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47266 LatexCommand bibitem
47272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47274 name "Documentation"
47275 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47279 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47285 \begin_inset Index idx
47288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47290 -packages ! hyperref
47296 \begin_inset Newline newline
47300 \begin_inset Flex URL
47303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47305 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47313 \begin_layout Bibliography
47314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47315 LatexCommand bibitem
47321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47323 name "Documentation"
47324 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47328 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47334 \begin_inset Index idx
47337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47339 -packages ! nomencl
47345 \begin_inset Newline newline
47349 \begin_inset Flex URL
47352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47354 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47362 \begin_layout Bibliography
47363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47364 LatexCommand bibitem
47370 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47372 name "Documentation"
47373 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47377 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47383 \begin_inset Index idx
47386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47388 -packages ! prettyref
47394 \begin_inset Newline newline
47398 \begin_inset Flex URL
47401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47403 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47411 \begin_layout Bibliography
47412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47413 LatexCommand bibitem
47419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47421 name "Documentation"
47422 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47426 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47432 \begin_inset Index idx
47435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47437 -packages ! refstyle
47443 \begin_inset Newline newline
47447 \begin_inset Flex URL
47450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47452 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47460 \begin_layout Bibliography
47461 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47462 LatexCommand bibitem
47468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47471 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47475 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47477 \begin_inset Newline newline
47481 \begin_inset Flex URL
47484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47486 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47494 \begin_layout Bibliography
47495 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47496 LatexCommand bibitem
47502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47505 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47509 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47511 \begin_inset Newline newline
47515 \begin_inset Flex URL
47518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47520 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47528 \begin_layout Bibliography
47529 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47530 LatexCommand bibitem
47536 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47539 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47543 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47544 for Cyrillic languages:
47545 \begin_inset Newline newline
47549 \begin_inset Flex URL
47552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47554 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47562 \begin_layout Bibliography
47563 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47564 LatexCommand bibitem
47570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47573 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47577 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47579 \begin_inset Newline newline
47583 \begin_inset Flex URL
47586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47588 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47596 \begin_layout Bibliography
47597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47598 LatexCommand bibitem
47604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47607 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47611 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47613 \begin_inset Newline newline
47617 \begin_inset Flex URL
47620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47622 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47630 \begin_layout Bibliography
47631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47632 LatexCommand bibitem
47638 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47641 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47645 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47647 \begin_inset Newline newline
47651 \begin_inset Flex URL
47654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47656 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47664 \begin_layout Bibliography
47665 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47666 LatexCommand bibitem
47672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47675 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47679 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47681 \begin_inset Newline newline
47685 \begin_inset Flex URL
47688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47690 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47698 \begin_layout Bibliography
47699 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47700 LatexCommand bibitem
47706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47709 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47713 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47715 \begin_inset Newline newline
47719 \begin_inset Flex URL
47722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47724 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47732 \begin_layout Bibliography
47733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47734 LatexCommand bibitem
47740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47743 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47747 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47749 \begin_inset Newline newline
47753 \begin_inset Flex URL
47756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47758 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47766 \begin_layout Bibliography
47767 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47768 LatexCommand bibitem
47774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47777 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47781 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47783 \begin_inset Newline newline
47787 \begin_inset Flex URL
47790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47792 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47800 \begin_layout Bibliography
47801 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47802 LatexCommand bibitem
47808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47811 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47815 about new features in
47821 \begin_inset Newline newline
47825 \begin_inset Flex URL
47828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47830 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47838 \begin_layout Standard
47839 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47873 \begin_inset Note Note
47876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47883 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47884 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47885 bibliography is the second one:
47893 \begin_layout Standard
47894 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47895 LatexCommand bibtex
47896 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47897 options "biblio/alphadin"
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47905 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47909 \begin_layout Standard
47910 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47911 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47917 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47918 LatexCommand printindex